CS310, CS410, CS510, and C2132

Machine Type 5027-2x0, -4x0, -6x0, -639

Service Manual

• Start diagnostics

• Maintenance

• Safety and notices

• Trademarks

• Index

December 15, 2015 www.lexmark.com

P/N 12G3220
 5027

Product information
Product name:
Lexmark CSx10 Series
Machine type:
5027
Model(s):
210, 230, 410, 430, 610, 630

Edition notice
December 15, 2015
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK
INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement
may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information
herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described
may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available
in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products,
programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.

Trademarks
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or
other countries.
PrintCryption is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a set of printer
commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language.
This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions
corresponding to the commands.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
P/N 12G3220
 5027

Table of contents
Product information......................................................................................2
Edition notice.................................................................................................2
Notices and safety information.................................................................. 11
Laser notices.........................................................................................................................................................11
Safety information.............................................................................................................................................. 14

Preface..........................................................................................................19
Service manual conventions........................................................................................................................... 19
Change history....................................................................................................................................................19

General information................................................................................... 23
Media guidelines............................................................................................................................................... 23
Paper guidelines.......................................................................................................................................................... 24
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...............................................................................................26
Supported paper sizes............................................................................................................................................... 26
Supported paper types and weights...................................................................................................................... 28
Using recycled paper and other office papers..........................................................................................29
Data security notice..........................................................................................................................................30
Tools required for service............................................................................................................................... 30

Diagnostic information.............................................................................. 33
Troubleshooting overview...............................................................................................................................33
Performing the initial troubleshooting check....................................................................................................... 33
Power‑on Reset (POR) sequence............................................................................................................................ 34
Using Safe Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 34
Fixing print quality issues................................................................................................................................ 35
Initial print quality check............................................................................................................................................ 36
Toner smear check...................................................................................................................................................... 36
Background or toner fog check................................................................................................................................37
Blank pages check...................................................................................................................................................... 39
Blurred or fuzzy print check...................................................................................................................................... 40
Half‑color page check................................................................................................................................................ 40
Horizontal banding check .......................................................................................................................................... 41
Horizontal line check................................................................................................................................................... 41
Missing image at edge check ................................................................................................................................... 41
Toner specks check .................................................................................................................................................... 42

Table of contents
3
 5027

Narrow vertical line check......................................................................................................................................... 42

Random marks check................................................................................................................................................. 42
Residual image check ................................................................................................................................................ 43
Solid color pages check ............................................................................................................................................ 43
Vertical banding check .............................................................................................................................................. 44
Light print on solids check ........................................................................................................................................ 44
Color problems check................................................................................................................................................ 44
Paper jams...........................................................................................................................................................45
Avoiding jams ............................................................................................................................................................... 45
Understanding jam messages and locations....................................................................................................... 46
200 paper jams.............................................................................................................................................................47
202 paper jams............................................................................................................................................................. 51
23y paper jams ............................................................................................................................................................ 56
24y paper jams ............................................................................................................................................................ 64
25y paper jams ............................................................................................................................................................ 68
Understanding printer messages...................................................................................................................71
Understanding the printer messages .................................................................................................................... 72
Printer hardware errors.....................................................................................................................................81
110 errors........................................................................................................................................................................ 82
121 errors........................................................................................................................................................................ 84
126 errors....................................................................................................................................................................... 90
133 errors ....................................................................................................................................................................... 90
141 errors ........................................................................................................................................................................ 93
147 errors ....................................................................................................................................................................... 95
171 errors ........................................................................................................................................................................ 97
Procedure before starting the 9yy service checks ............................................................................................ 98
900 errors ................................................................................................................................................................... 100
91y errors ......................................................................................................................................................................106
938 errors.....................................................................................................................................................................106
95y errors .....................................................................................................................................................................107
96y errors ......................................................................................................................................................................110
97y errors .......................................................................................................................................................................111
982 errors......................................................................................................................................................................112
990 errors......................................................................................................................................................................112
Base printer symptoms ..............................................................................................................................................114
Bin‑full/narrow media sensor service check ........................................................................................................115
Toner meter cycle (TMC) card service check....................................................................................................... 117
Dead printer service check....................................................................................................................................... 117
Front door sensor or switches service check......................................................................................................119
Operator panel (display is dim and unchanging) service check....................................................................123
Operator panel (displays all diamonds, no beeps, or five beeps) service check...................................... 127
Operator panel (display blank) service check .....................................................................................................131
Operator panel (one or more operator panel buttons fail) service check...................................................135
Operator panel USB cable service check............................................................................................................136

Table of contents
4
 5027

USB service check ..................................................................................................................................................... 137

Network service check ............................................................................................................................................. 137
Input option hardware errors........................................................................................................................140
550‑sheet and 650‑sheet trays input option symptoms .................................................................................140
Tray (x) sensor service check ...................................................................................................................................141
Option and media size not recognized service check .....................................................................................142
Double feed and printout skewed service check..............................................................................................144
Failed to load/feed from multipurpose feeder service check ........................................................................ 147
Failed to feed from option tray and leading edge damaged service check ..............................................149
Tray 2 or tray 3 not detected service check........................................................................................................152
Tray 2 or tray 3 missing service check .................................................................................................................154
Tray 2 or tray 3 empty service check .................................................................................................................... 157
Incompatible tray 3 service check .........................................................................................................................159

Service menus........................................................................................... 163

Understanding the printer control panel................................................................................................... 163
Using the printer control panel...............................................................................................................................163
Understanding the colors of the indicator light and Sleep button lights.....................................................165
Diagnostics menu............................................................................................................................................ 166
Entering diagnostics mode ......................................................................................................................................166
REGISTRATION ........................................................................................................................................................... 167
Skew ..............................................................................................................................................................................168
Quick Test.....................................................................................................................................................................168
Alignment Menu..........................................................................................................................................................169
MISC TESTS .................................................................................................................................................................170
PRINT TESTS ................................................................................................................................................................ 171
Feed Tests ..................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Print quality test pages ............................................................................................................................................. 172
HARDWARE TESTS .................................................................................................................................................... 172
DUPLEX TESTS ........................................................................................................................................................... 173
INPUT TRAY TESTS ................................................................................................................................................... 176
BASE SENSOR TEST .................................................................................................................................................176
DEVICE TESTS ............................................................................................................................................................ 177
PRINTER SETUP.......................................................................................................................................................... 178
EP SETUP ......................................................................................................................................................................181
TPS Setup: Right or Left.............................................................................................................................................181
TPS Setup: Reset Color Cal .....................................................................................................................................182
TPS Setup: Cal Ref Adj..............................................................................................................................................182
REPORTS ......................................................................................................................................................................182
EVENT LOG..................................................................................................................................................................183
Exit Diagnostics...........................................................................................................................................................184
Configuration menu........................................................................................................................................ 185
Entering configuration mode...................................................................................................................................185
Print Quality Pages.....................................................................................................................................................185

Table of contents
5
 5027

Fuser Cleaning Process............................................................................................................................................185

Reports ..........................................................................................................................................................................186
Color Trapping.............................................................................................................................................................186
Tray Insert Msg............................................................................................................................................................186
Panel Menus ................................................................................................................................................................186
PPDS Emulation .......................................................................................................................................................... 187
Download emuls......................................................................................................................................................... 187
Safe Mode .................................................................................................................................................................... 187
Demo Mode ................................................................................................................................................................. 187
Energy Conserve........................................................................................................................................................ 187
Auto Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................. 187
Auto Align Adj .............................................................................................................................................................188
Color Alignment ..........................................................................................................................................................188
Paper Prompts.............................................................................................................................................................188
Envelope Prompts ......................................................................................................................................................189
Action for prompts .....................................................................................................................................................189
Jobs on Disk ................................................................................................................................................................190
Disk Encryption ...........................................................................................................................................................190
Font Sharpening .........................................................................................................................................................190
Require Standby .........................................................................................................................................................190
UI Automation...............................................................................................................................................................191
LES Applications ..........................................................................................................................................................191
Key Repeat Initial Delay .............................................................................................................................................191
Key Repeat Rate ..........................................................................................................................................................191
Clear Supply Usage History.....................................................................................................................................192
Clear Custom Status ..................................................................................................................................................192
USB Speed...................................................................................................................................................................192
Automatically Display Error Screens .....................................................................................................................192
USB PnP........................................................................................................................................................................192
Restore Factory Defaults ..........................................................................................................................................193
ADF Edge Erase..........................................................................................................................................................193
Size sensing.................................................................................................................................................................194
Factory Defaults..........................................................................................................................................................194
Exit Config ....................................................................................................................................................................195
Entering invalid engine mode...................................................................................................................... 195
Entering recovery mode................................................................................................................................ 195
Accessing the Network SE menu................................................................................................................ 196
Accessing the service engineer (SE) menu.............................................................................................. 196

Repair information.................................................................................... 197

Removal precautions.......................................................................................................................................197
Data security notice ................................................................................................................................................... 197
Handling ESD‑sensitive parts..................................................................................................................................198

Table of contents
6
 5027

Controller board/control panel replacement ......................................................................................................198

Restoring the printer configuration after replacing the controller board ....................................................199
Restoring solutions, licenses, and configuration settings ............................................................................. 202
Updating the printer firmware ...............................................................................................................................203
Backing up eSF solutions and settings ...............................................................................................................204
Ribbon cable connectors ....................................................................................................................................... 205
Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connectors............................................................................................................ 205
Horizontal top contact connector ................................................................................................................... 206
Horizontal bottom contact connector ............................................................................................................ 209
Vertical mount contact connector .....................................................................................................................212
Horizontal sliding contact connector ...............................................................................................................215
Low Insertion Force (LIF) connector .................................................................................................................218
Removal procedures.......................................................................................................................................219
Left side removals............................................................................................................................................219
Left cover assembly removal ..................................................................................................................................219
Drive unit motor removal..........................................................................................................................................221
EP drive assembly removal......................................................................................................................................221
Developer drive coupling removal .......................................................................................................................227
Low‑voltage power supply (LVPS) assembly removal .....................................................................................232
Fuser exit sensor removal.......................................................................................................................................233
Bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag removal......................................................................................................... 237
Speaker removal .......................................................................................................................................................238
Right side removals........................................................................................................................................238
Right cover assembly removal...............................................................................................................................238
Toner supply door removal .....................................................................................................................................239
Fuser drive motor assembly removal...................................................................................................................240
Toner meter cycle (TMC) card removal................................................................................................................240
Toner density sensor (TDS) (left or right sensor) removal...............................................................................242
Developer unit removal ...........................................................................................................................................244
High‑voltage power supply (HVPS) removal......................................................................................................245
Image transfer unit (ITU) removal..........................................................................................................................249
Imaging unit (IU) removal.........................................................................................................................................252
Toner cartridge contacts removal .........................................................................................................................254
Waste toner bottle removal ....................................................................................................................................256
Waste toner bottle contact block removal..........................................................................................................257
Front removals.................................................................................................................................................258
Front cover assembly removal...............................................................................................................................258
Operator panel bezel removal.............................................................................................................................. 260
Operator panel removal (for CS310 models only)............................................................................................ 260
Operator panel removal (for CS410 models only).............................................................................................262
Operator panel removal (for CS510 models only) ............................................................................................265
Operator panel logo plate removal ......................................................................................................................268
USB port connector removal..................................................................................................................................269
Duplex reference edge removal ............................................................................................................................ 271

Table of contents
7
 5027

Fuser assembly removal.......................................................................................................................................... 273

Exit deflector removal ..............................................................................................................................................275
Right output bin deflector removal ....................................................................................................................... 277
Bottom removals............................................................................................................................................. 277
Pick tires removal ...................................................................................................................................................... 277
Lower left frame removal.........................................................................................................................................279
Lower right frame removal......................................................................................................................................286
Duplex sensor removal........................................................................................................................................... 290
ITU guide removal......................................................................................................................................................291
Tray present sensor removal..................................................................................................................................294
Paper pick motor drive assembly standard tray removal ...............................................................................295
Rear side removals.........................................................................................................................................298
Rear cover removal...................................................................................................................................................298
Controller board removal ....................................................................................................................................... 300
Top side removals...........................................................................................................................................302
Top cover assembly removal..................................................................................................................................302
Bin‑full/narrow media sensor removal.................................................................................................................305
Printhead removal .....................................................................................................................................................307
Options removals............................................................................................................................................308
650‑sheet duo drawer tray assembly removal .................................................................................................308
650‑sheet duo drawer assembly removal..........................................................................................................309
Dust cover removal....................................................................................................................................................310
Pick tire removal ..........................................................................................................................................................311

Component locations............................................................................... 313

Controller board connectors.........................................................................................................................313

Maintenance.............................................................................................. 321
Inspection guide...............................................................................................................................................321
Scheduled maintenance............................................................................................................................... 322
Maintenance kits........................................................................................................................................................322
Preventive maintenance............................................................................................................................... 322
Device‑specific preventive maintenance............................................................................................................322
Lubrication specification............................................................................................................................... 323
Cleaning the printer........................................................................................................................................323
Cleaning the exterior of the printer ......................................................................................................................323
Cleaning the printhead lenses...............................................................................................................................323

Parts catalog............................................................................................. 326

Legend...............................................................................................................................................................326
Assembly 1: Covers.........................................................................................................................................327

Table of contents
8
 5027

Assembly 2: Frames........................................................................................................................................ 331

Assembly 3: Electronics.................................................................................................................................333
Assembly 4: Cables and sensors................................................................................................................ 337
Assembly 5: Media drawers and trays...................................................................................................... 339
Assembly 6: Options and miscellaneous...................................................................................................341

Appendix A: Printer specifications.........................................................343

Power specifications...................................................................................................................................... 343
Electrical specifications................................................................................................................................. 343
Operating clearances.....................................................................................................................................344
Acoustics........................................................................................................................................................... 346
Environment..................................................................................................................................................... 346
Processor...........................................................................................................................................................347

Appendix B: Options and features.........................................................349

Available internal options............................................................................................................................. 349
Media handling options.................................................................................................................................349
Option configurations.................................................................................................................................... 350

Appendix C: Theory of operation........................................................... 353

Paper path and transport components..................................................................................................... 353
Paper path information ............................................................................................................................................353
Transport components .............................................................................................................................................354
Duplexing ....................................................................................................................................................................354
Print engine theory......................................................................................................................................... 356
Electrophotographic process (EP process) ........................................................................................................356
Electrophotographic process basics....................................................................................................................356
Color theory......................................................................................................................................................359
Color theory ................................................................................................................................................................359

Appendix D: Acronyms............................................................................ 363

Acronyms.......................................................................................................................................................... 363

Appendix E: Screw and retainer identification table...........................365

Screw and retainer identification table..................................................................................................... 365

Index...........................................................................................................368
Part number index.................................................................................... 375

Table of contents
9
 5027

Part name index........................................................................................379

Table of contents
10
 5027

Notices and safety information

Laser notices
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser
that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The
laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I
level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser-Hinweis
Der Drucker wurde in den USA zertifiziert und entspricht den DHHS-Vorschriften 21 CFR, Kapitel I, Unterkapitel J
für Laserprodukte der Klasse I (1); andernorts ist er als Laserprodukt der Klasse I zertifiziert, das den IEC 60825-1-
Anforderungen entspricht.
Laserprodukte der Klasse I werden nicht als gefährlich eingestuft. Der Drucker enthält im Inneren einen Laser
der Klasse IIIb (3b), und zwar einen 7-Milliwatt-Gallium-Arsenid-Laser, der im Wellenlängenbereich von 655 bis
675 Nanometern arbeitet. Das Lasersystem und der Drucker sind so konstruiert, dass unter normalen
Betriebsbedingungen, bei der Wartung durch den Benutzer oder bei den vorgeschriebenen
Wartungsbedingungen Menschen keiner Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt sind, die die Werte für Klasse I
überschreitet.

Avis relatif à l'utilisation du laser

L'imprimante est certifiée conforme aux exigences de la réglementation des Etats-Unis relative aux produits
laser (DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I (1)). Pour les autres pays, elle est certifiée conforme aux
exigences des normes IEC 60825-1 relatives aux produits laser de classe I.
Les produits laser de Classe I ne sont pas considérés comme dangereux. L'imprimante contient un laser de
classe IIIb (3b), laser arséniure de gallium 7 milliwatts opérant sur une longueur d'onde de l'ordre de 655 à
675 nanomètres. Le système laser ainsi que l'imprimante ont été conçus de manière à ce que personne ne soit
exposé à des rayonnements laser dépassant le niveau de classe I dans le cadre d'un fonctionnement normal,
de l'entretien par l'utilisateur ou de la maintenance.

Avvertenze sui prodotti laser

La stampante è certificata negli Stati Uniti come stampante conforme ai requisiti DHHS 21 CFR, Capitolo I,
Sottocapitolo J per i prodotti laser di Classe I (1), mentre in altri paesi è certificata come prodotto laser di Classe
I conforme ai requisiti IEC 60825-1.
I prodotti laser di Classe I non sono considerati pericolosi. La stampante contiene un laser di Classe IIIb (3b),
che è nominalmente un laser ad arseniuro di gallio a 7 milliwatt funzionante a una lunghezza d'onda di 655-675
nanometri. Il sistema laser e la stampante sono stati progettati in modo da impedire l'esposizione a radiazioni
laser superiori al livello previsto dalla Classe I durante le normali operazioni di stampa, manutenzione o
assistenza.

Notices and safety information

11
 5027

Aviso de láser
Esta impresora se ha certificado en EE. UU. de conformidad con los requisitos de DHHS 21 CFR, capítulo I,
subcapítulo J, para los productos láser de Clase I (1), y en otros países está certificada como un producto láser
de Clase I de acuerdo con los requisitos de IEC 60825-1.
Los productos láser de Clase I no se consideran peligrosos. La impresora contiene un láser interno de Clase
IIIb (3b) que nominalmente es un láser de arseniuro de galio de 7 milivatios que funciona en una longitud de
onda de 655-675 nanómetros. El sistema láser y la impresora se han diseñado para que ningún individuo
acceda nunca a las radiaciones láser por encima del nivel de Clase I durante su uso normal, ni en tareas de
mantenimiento o intervenciones de servicio técnico prescritas.

Aviso sobre laser

A impressora foi certificada nos EUA por estar em conformidade com os requisitos do DHHS 21 CFR, capítulo
I, subcapítulo J, para produtos a laser de Classe I (1) e, nos demais países, foi certificada como produto a laser
de Classe I em conformidade com os requisitos da IEC 60825-1.
Os produtos a laser de Classe I não são considerados perigosos. A impressora contém, internamente, um laser
de Classe IIIb (3b) que é um laser de arsenieto de gálio de 7 miliwatts operando no comprimento de onda de
655-675 nanômetros. O sistema do laser e a impressora foram projetados para que jamais haja acesso humano
à radiação do laser acima do nível da Classe I durante a operação normal ou a manutenção pelo usuário ou
sob as condições de manutenção prescritas.

Laserinformatie
Deze printer is in de Verenigde Staten gecertificeerd als een product dat voldoet aan de vereisten van DHHS
21 CFR, hoofdstuk 1, paragraaf J voor laserproducten van klasse I (1). Elders is de printer gecertificeerd als een
laserproduct van klasse I dat voldoet aan de vereisten van IEC 60825-1.
Laserproducten van klasse I worden geacht geen gevaar op te leveren. De printer bevat intern een laser van
klasse IIIb (3b), een galliumarsenide laser met een nominaal vermogen van 7 milliwatt en een golflengtebereik
van 655-675 nanometer. Het lasersysteem en de printer zijn zodanig ontworpen dat gebruikers nooit blootstaan
aan laserstraling die hoger is dan het toegestane niveau voor klasse I-apparaten, tijdens normaal gebruik,
onderhoudswerkzaamheden door de gebruiker of voorgeschreven servicewerkzaamheden.

Lasererklæring
Denne printer er certificeret i USA i henhold til kravene i DHHS 21 CFR, afsnit I, underafsnit J, for Klasse I-
laserprodukter (1) og certificeret andetsteds som et Klasse I-laserprodukt i henhold til kravene i IEC 60825-1.
Klasse I-laserprodukter anses ikke for at være farlige. Printeren indeholder internt en klasse IIIb (3b)-laser, der
nominelt er en 7 milliwatt galliumarsenid-laser, som fungerer i bølgelængdeområdet 655-675 nanometer.
Lasersystemet og printeren er udviklet på en sådan måde, at der ikke er en direkte laserstråling, der overskrider
Klasse I-niveauet under normal brug, brugers vedligeholdelse eller de foreskrevne servicebetingelser.

Laserilmoitus
Tämä tulostin on sertifioitu Yhdysvalloissa DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J -standardin mukaiseksi luokan
I (1) -lasertuotteeksi ja muualla IEC 60825-1 -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I lasertuotteeksi.

Notices and safety information

12
 5027

Luokan I lasertuotteita ei pidetä haitallisina. Tulostimen sisällä on luokan IIIb (3b) laser, joka on nimellisteholtaan
7 mW:n galliumarsenidilaser ja toimii 655–675 nanometrin aallonpituuksilla. Laserjärjestelmä ja tulostin ovat
rakenteeltaan sellaisia, että käyttäjä ei joudu alttiiksi luokkaa 1 suuremmalle säteilylle normaalin käytön,
ylläpidon tai huollon aikana.

Lasermeddelande
Skrivaren är certifierad i USA enligt kraven i DHHS 21 CFR, avsnitt I, underavsnitt J för laserprodukter av klass
I (1) och i andra länder är den certifierad som en laserprodukt av klass I som uppfyller kraven i IEC 60825-1.
Laserprodukter av klass I anses inte vara skadliga. Skrivaren innehåller en klass IIIb (3b)-laser, vilket är en 7 mW
galliumarseniklaser som arbetar inom en våglängd på 655–675 nm. Lasersystemet och skrivaren är utformade
så att människor aldrig utsätts för laserstrålning över klass I-nivå under normala förhållanden vid användning,
underhåll eller service.

Lasermerknad
Skriveren er sertifisert i USA for samsvar med kravene i DHHS 21 CFR, kapittel I, underkapittel J for
laserprodukter av klasse I (1), og er andre steder sertifisert som et laserprodukt av klasse I som samsvarer med
kravene i IEC 60825-1.
Laserprodukter av klasse I anses ikke som helseskadelige. Skriveren inneholder en intern laser av klasse IIIb
(3b) som nominelt er en 7 milliwatt galliumarsenid-laser, og som opererer i bølgelengder på 655-675 nanometer.
Lasersystemet og skriveren er utformet slik at mennesker ikke utsettes for laserstråling utover nivået i klasse
I under normal drift, vedlikehold eller foreskrevet service.

Avís sobre el làser

Als EUA, la impressora està certificada de conformitat amb els requisits del capítol I, apartat J del CFR 21 del
Departament de Salut i Serveis Humans per a productes làser de classe I (1) i a la resta de països està certificada
com a producte làser de classe I d'acord amb els requisits de la norma IEC 60825-1.
Els productes làser de classe I no es consideren perillosos. A l'interior de la impressora hi ha un làser de classe
IIIb (3b) que nominalment es un arsenur de galió de 7 mil·liwatts que funciona a una longitud d'ona de 655-675
nanòmetres. El sistema làser y la impressora s'han dissenyat amb l'objectiu d'impedir l'accés humà de la radiació
làser superior al nivell de classe I durant un funcionament normal, el manteniment per part de l'usuari o les
condicions de servei prescrites.

レーザーに関する通知
本機は、米国においてクラス I（1）レーザー製品に対する DHHS 21 CFR、Chapter I、Subchapter J の要件
に準拠し、その他の国では IEC 60825-1 の要件に準拠するクラス I レーザー製品として認可されています。
クラス I レーザー製品は、危険性がないとみなされています。 本機には、クラス IIIb（3b）レーザーが内蔵
されています。これは、655 ～ 675 ナノメートルの波長で動作する定格 7 ミリワットのガリウムヒ素レー
ザーです。 レーザーシステムとプリンタは、通常の操作、ユーザーによるメンテナンス、または所定のサ
ービス条件の下で、ユーザーがクラス I レベルを超えるレーザー放射に絶対にさらされないように設計され
ています。

레이저 관련 공지
이 프린터는 미국에서 DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J의 요구 사항을 준수하는 클래스 I(1) 레이저 제품
으로 승인되었으며 이외 지역에서 IEC 60825-1의 요구 사항을 준수하는 클래스 I 레이저 제품으로 승인되었습
니다.

Notices and safety information

13
 5027

Class I 레이저 제품은 위험한 제품으로 간주되지 않습니다. 프린터에는 655-675 나노미터의 파장 영역에서 작
동하는 공칭 7밀리와트 갈륨 비소 레이저인 클래스 IIIb(3b) 레이저가 내부에 포함되어 있습니다. 레이저 시스템
과 프린터는 정상적인 작동, 사용자 유지 관리 또는 사전 설명된 서비스 조건에는 사람에게 클래스 I 수준 이상
의 레이저 방사가 노출되지 않도록 설계되었습니다.

激光注意事项
本打印机在美国认证合乎 DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I，Subchapter J 对分类 I（1）激光产品的标准，而在其他地
区则被认证是合乎 IEC 60825-1 的分类 I 激光产品。
一般认为分类 I 激光产品不具有危险性。本打印机内部含有分类 IIIb（3b）的激光，在操作过程中会产生额定
7 毫瓦的砷化镓激光，其波长范围在 655-675nm 之间。本激光系统及打印机的设计，在一般操作、使用者维
护或规定内的维修情况下，不会使人体接触分类 I 以上等级的辐射。

雷射聲明
本印表機係經過美國核可，符合 DHHS 21 CFR，Chapter I，Subchapter J 規定的 I (1) 級雷射產品激光注意事
项；在美國以外的地區，為符合 IEC 60825-1 規定的 I 級雷射產品。
根據 I 級雷射產品的規定，這類產品不會對人體造成傷害。本機所採用之 IIIb (3b) 級雷射只會產生 7 百萬分之
一瓦特 (milliwatt)、波長 655 至 675 億分之一米 (nanometer) 的鎵砷放射線 (gallium arsenide laser)。使用者只
要以正確的方法操作及維護保養，並依照先前所述之維修方式進行修護，此印表機與其雷射系統絕不會產生 I
級以上的放射線，而對人體造成傷害。

Safety information
Safety information
• The safety of this product is based on testing and approvals of the original design and specific components.
The manufacturer is not responsible for safety in the event of use of unauthorized replacement parts.
• The maintenance information for this product has been prepared for use by a professional service person
and is not intended to be used by others.
• There may be an increased risk of electric shock and personal injury during disassembly and servicing of
this product. Professional service personnel should understand this and take necessary precautions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if
a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery.
Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

Consignes de sécurité
• La sécurité de ce produit repose sur des tests et des agréations portant sur sa conception d'origine et sur
des composants particuliers. Le fabricant n'assume aucune responsabilité concernant la sécurité en cas
d'utilisation de pièces de rechange non agréées.
• Les consignes d'entretien et de réparation de ce produit s'adressent uniquement à un personnel de
maintenance qualifié.
• Le démontage et l'entretien de ce produit pouvant présenter certains risques électriques, le personnel
d'entretien qualifié devra prendre toutes les précautions nécessaires.

Notices and safety information

14
 5027

AVERTISSEMENT—RISQUE DE BLESSURE
La batterie lithium de ce produit n'est pas destinée à être remplacée. Il existe un risque d'explosion
si une batterie lithium est placée de façon incorrecte. Ne rechargez pas, ne démontez pas et
n’incinérez pas une batterie lithium. Mettez les batteries lithium usagées au rebut selon les
instructions du fabricant et les réglementations locales.

Norme di sicurezza
• La sicurezza del prodotto si basa sui test e sull'approvazione del progetto originale e dei componenti
specifici. Il produttore non è responsabile per la sicurezza in caso di sostituzione non autorizzata delle parti.
• Le informazioni riguardanti la manutenzione di questo prodotto sono indirizzate soltanto al personale di
assistenza autorizzato.
• Durante lo smontaggio e la manutenzione di questo prodotto, il rischio di subire scosse elettriche e danni
alla persona è più elevato. Il personale di assistenza autorizzato deve, quindi, adottare le precauzioni
necessarie.
ATTENZIONE — PERICOLO DI LESIONI
La batteria al litio presente del prodotto non deve essere sostituita. In caso di sostituzione errata
della batteria al litio, potrebbe verificarsi un'esplosione. Non ricaricare, smontare o bruciare batterie
al litio. Smaltire le batterie al litio usate seguendo le istruzioni del produttore e le norme locali.

Sicherheitshinweise
• Die Sicherheit dieses Produkts basiert auf Tests und Zulassungen des ursprünglichen Modells und
bestimmter Bauteile. Bei Verwendung nicht genehmigter Ersatzteile wird vom Hersteller keine
Verantwortung oder Haftung für die Sicherheit übernommen.
• Die Wartungsinformationen für dieses Produkt sind ausschließlich für die Verwendung durch einen
Wartungsfachmann bestimmt.
• Während des Auseinandernehmens und der Wartung des Geräts besteht ein zusätzliches Risiko eines
elektrischen Schlags und körperlicher Verletzung. Das zuständige Fachpersonal sollte entsprechende
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen treffen.
VORSICHT - VERLETZUNGSGEFAHR
Die Lithiumbatterie in diesem Produkt darf nicht ausgetauscht werden. Wird eine Lithiumbatterie
nicht ordnungsgemäß ausgetauscht, besteht Explosionsgefahr. Lithiumbatterien dürfen auf keinen
Fall wieder aufgeladen, auseinander genommen oder verbrannt werden. Befolgen Sie zum
Entsorgen verbrauchter Lithiumbatterien die Anweisungen des Herstellers und die örtlichen
Bestimmungen.

Pautas de Seguridad
• La seguridad de este producto se basa en pruebas y aprobaciones del diseño original y componentes
específicos. El fabricante no es responsable de la seguridad en caso de uso de piezas de repuesto no
autorizadas.
• La información sobre el mantenimiento de este producto está dirigida exclusivamente al personal
cualificado de mantenimiento.
• Existe mayor riesgo de descarga eléctrica y de daños personales durante el desmontaje y la reparación de
la máquina. El personal cualificado debe ser consciente de este peligro y tomar las precauciones necesarias.

Notices and safety information

15
 5027

PRECAUCIÓN: POSIBLES DAÑOS PERSONALES

La batería de litio de este producto no debe reemplazarse. Existe riesgo de explosión si se sustituye
incorrectamente una batería de litio. No recargue, desmonte ni incinere una batería de litio. Deseche
las baterías de litio según las instrucciones del fabricante y las normativas locales.

Informações de Segurança
• A segurança deste produto baseia-se em testes e aprovações do modelo original e de componentes
específicos. O fabricante não é responsável pela segunrança, no caso de uso de peças de substituição não
autorizadas.
• As informações de segurança relativas a este produto destinam-se a profissionais destes serviços e não
devem ser utilizadas por outras pessoas.
• Risco de choques eléctricos e ferimentos graves durante a desmontagem e manutenção deste produto.
Os profissionais destes serviços devem estar avisados deste facto e tomar os cuidados necessários.
ATENÇÃO — RISCO DE FERIMENTO
A bateria de lítio neste produto não deve ser substituída. Existe o risco de explosão se uma bateria
de lítio for substituída incorretamente. Não recarregue, desmonte ou incinere uma bateria de lítio.
Descarte as baterias de lítio usadas de acordo com as instruções do fabricante e regulamentos
locais.

Informació de Seguretat
• La seguretat d'aquest producte es basa en l'avaluació i aprovació del disseny original i els components
específics. El fabricant no es fa responsable de les qüestions de seguretat si s'utilitzen peces de recanvi no
autoritzades.
• La informació pel manteniment d’aquest producte està orientada exclusivament a professionals i no està
destinada a ningú que no ho sigui.
• El risc de xoc elèctric i de danys personals pot augmentar durant el procés de desmuntatge i de servei
d’aquest producte. El personal professional ha d’estar-ne assabentat i prendre les mesures convenients.
ATENCIÓ
La bateria de liti d'aquest producte no ha estat dissenyada perquè es substitueixi. Hi ha perill
d’explosió si no es substitueix correctament la bateria de liti. No recarregueu, desmunteu o
incinereu una bateria de liti. Desfeu-vos de les bateries de liti usades d’acord amb les instruccions
del fabricant i les regulacions locals.

안전 사항
• 본 제품은 원래 설계및특정 구성에 대한 테스트 결과로 안정 성이 입증된 것입니다. 따라서 무허가 교체부
품을 사용하는 경 우 에는 제조업체에서 안전에 대한 책임을 지지 않습니다.
• 본 제품에 관한 유지 보수 설명 서는 전문 서비스 기술자 용으로 작성된 것이므로, 비 전문가는 사용할 수 없
습니다.
• 본 제품을 해체하거나 정비할 경우, 전 기전 인 충 경 을 받거나 상 처를 입을 위험이 커집니다. 전문 서비스
기술자는 이 사실을 숙지하고, 필요한 예방조치를 취하도록 하십시오.
주의—부상 위험
이 제품에 들어 있는 리튬 배터리는 교체할 수 없습니다. 리튬 배터리를 잘못 교체하면 폭발할 위험
이 있습니다. 리튬 배터리를 재충전하거나, 분해하거나, 태우지 마십시오. 제조업체의 지침과 지역
규정에 따라 다 쓴 리튬 배터리를 폐기하십시오.

Notices and safety information

16
 5027

安全信息
• 本产品的安全性以原来设计和特定产品的测试结果和认证为基础。万一使用来经许可的替换部件，制造商
不对安全性负责。
• 本产品的维护信息仅供专业服务人员使用，并不打算证其他人使用。
• 本产品在拆卸、维修时，遭受电击或人员受伤的危险性会增高，专业服务人员对这点必须有所了触，并采
取必要的预防措施。
当心一可能的伤害：
本产品中的锂电池不可更换。如果不正确更换锂电池，可能会有爆炸危险。不要再 充电、拆解或
焚烧锂电池。丢弃旧的锂电池时应按照制造商的指导及当地法规进行处理。

Notices and safety information

17
 5027

18
 5027

Preface
This manual contains maintenance procedures for service personnel.
It is divided into the following chapters:
• General information contains a general description of the printer. Special tools and test equipment are
discussed.
• Diagnostic information contains diagnostic aids you can use to isolate failing FRUs. These diagnostic aids
include error code tables, symptom tables, and service checks.
• Service menus contains descriptions of the printer interface, the user and service menus.
• Repair information provides instructions for making printer adjustments and removing and installing FRUs.
• Component locations uses illustrations to identify the basic printer parts.
• Maintenance contains the lubrication specifications and recommendations to prevent problems.
• Parts catalog contains illustrations and part numbers for individual FRUs.
• Appendix A: Printer specifications contains detailed specifications about the product.
• Appendix B: Options and features contains the available options and other features of the product.
• Appendix C: Theory of operation contains the theory of operation.
• Appendix D: Acronyms contains the list of acronyms in the manual and their meanings.

Service manual conventions

Note: A note provides additional information.
Warning—Potential Damage: A warning identifies something that may damage the product hardware or
software.
This service manual uses several different types of caution statements:
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: A caution identifies something that may cause harm to the service
technician.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: This type of caution indicates a danger from hazardous voltage in the
area of the product where you are working. Unplug the product before you start working, or use caution
if the product must receive power to perform the task.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: This type of caution indicates a hot surface.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: This type of caution indicates a tipping hazard.

Change history
December 15, 2015
• Added note at the end of the “Fuser removal” topic of the ”Front removals” group of the “Repair information”
chapter.
• Added note at the end of the “Image transfer unit (ITU) removal” topic of the ”Right side removals” group
of the “Repair information” chapter.

Preface
19
 5027

November 20, 2015

• Updated the Covers assembly in the Parts catalog chapter.
• Updated the Cleaning the printhead lenses topic in the Maintenance chapter.

October 6, 2015
• Added PN 41X0826 in the Parts catalog chapter.
• Added the Developer drive coupling removal topic in the Repair chapter.

April 29, 2015

• Removed the Bubble sensors topic from the Theory of operation section.

April 14, 2015

• Updated the Sensor Test topic in the Service menus chapter.

March 30, 2015

• Updated the Image transfer unit (ITU) removal topic in the Repair information chapter.
• Updated the Controller board/control panel replacement topic in the Repair chapter.

November 28, 2014

• Updated the Image transfer unit (ITU) removal topic in the Repair information chapter.

November 06, 2014

• Added the ITU guide removal topic in the Repair information chapter.
• Added the ITU guide FRU (PN 41X0580) in the Parts catalog chapter.

June 10, 2014

• Updated the Inspection guide topic in the Maintenance chapter.

May 28, 2014

• Updated the Input option hardware errors section in the Diagnostic information chapter.

May 5, 2014
• Updated the fuser assembly removal topic in the Repair information chapter.

April 1, 2014
• Added PN 41X0001 in the Parts catalog chapter.
• Updated the Frames section in the Parts catalog chapter.
• Added the Drive unit motor removal in the Repair information chapter.
• Removed the Transfer module removal topic from the Repair information chapter.

February 28, 2014

• Added the Restoring solutions, licenses, and configuration settings topic under Removal precautions.
• Updated the Restoring the printer configuration after replacing the controller board topic.
• Changed the title from eSF backup to Backing up eSF solutions and settings, and updated the topic.

Preface
20
 5027

• Updated the Controller board removal topic.

• Updated the Image transfer unit (ITU) removal topic.
• Editorial changes

February 13, 2014

• Editorial changes.

February 5, 2014
• Editorial changes.

January 16, 2014

• Updated the Diagnostics menu and Configurations menu sections.
• Revised the Updating the printer firmware topic.
• Added the Image transfer unit (ITU) removal topic in the Repair information chapter.

December 16, 2013

• Updated the Dead printer service check topic in the Diagnostic information chapter.

November 27, 2013

• Updated the controller board removal topic in the Repair chapter.

October 17, 2013

• Replaced PN 40X7634 with PN 40X7579 in the Parts catalog chapter.
• Removed PN 40X0395 from the Parts catalog chapter.

September 16, 2013

• Updated the printer model names in the cover page.

August 19, 2013

• Updated the paper jam topics in the Diagnostic information chapter.
• Updated the installation note in the controller board removal topic.

August 8, 2013
• Updated the “Tray (x) sensor service check” topic.
• Added the 550 and 650 input option service check group and topics.
• Added the “Steps before starting the 9yy service checks” topic in the Diagnostics information chapter.
• Added PN 40X9244 in assembly 1 of the parts catalog.
• Added the “Restoring the printer configuration after replacing the controller board” topic under the Removal
precautions.

July 12, 2013

• Added relocation kit (PN 40X8701) in the Parts catalog chapter.

Preface
21
 5027

June 5, 2013
• Added BSD model name (C2132) in the Parts catalog chapter.

May 27, 2013

• Added C2132 in the title.
• Added 5027-639 in the machine type model.
• Added description for C2132 in the General Information chapter.

April 1, 2013
• Updated the safety information topic.
• Updated the installation note in the Printhead removal topic.

February 4, 2013
• Added the model numbers in the General information chapter.
• Added the “Updating the printer firmware” topic in the Service menus chapter.

January 17, 2013

• Updated the description for PN 40X3141 in Assembly 3 of the Parts catalog chapter.
• Removed “Printhead to controller board cable” in the item list under PN 40X7647 in Assembly 4 of the Parts
catalog chapter.
• Added an installation note in the controller board removal procedure in the Repair information chapter.

January 10, 2013

• Replaced PN 40X0259 to PN 40X4596 for the Brazil power cord in Assembly 3 of the Parts catalog chapter.
• Updated the description for PN 40X1766 to Bolivia and Peru only in Assembly 3 of the Parts catalog chapter.
• Added PN 40X0269 for the power cord for USA, Canada, APG, and LAD in Assembly 3 of the Parts catalog
chapter.
• Deleted these PNs in Assembly 6 of the Parts catalog chapter: 40X1455, 40X7857, 40X7445, and 40X7567.

Preface
22
 5027

General information
The LexmarkTM CS310 , CS410 , and CS510 models are color network printers in compact sizes. Some models
have internal duplex printing, USBA host ports for flash drives on the operator panel, and an optional 650-sheet
Duo Drawer with 550 sheets in the input tray and 100 sheets for the multipurpose feeder. The Lexmark
5027‑630 has a standard 650-sheet Duo Drawer and the option to add a 550-sheet tray, which brings the input
for that model up to 1,451 sheets. The Lexmark 5027‑610 comes with wireless network and duplex printing. All
information in this service manual pertains to all models unless explicitly noted.
The printers are available in the following models:
Model Configurations Machine type / model
CS310n Ethernet network, DDR3 DIMM, Flash memory, optional 5027‑210
650‑sheet duo drawer with integrated multipurpose
feeder
CS310dn Ethernet network, duplex, DDR3 DIMM, Flash memory, 5027‑230
optional 550‑sheet tray, optional 650‑sheet duo
drawer with integrated multipurpose feeder
CS410n Ethernet network, USBA host port for flash drives, 2.4” 5027‑410
display and UICC card, standard 650‑sheet duo drawer
with integrated multipurpose feeder
CS410dn USBA host port for flash drive, duplex, Ethernet 5027‑430
network, 2.4” display and UICC card, standard
650‑sheet duo drawer with integrated multipurpose
feeder
CS510de USBA host port for flash drive, duplex, 802.11n wireless 5027‑630
network, Ethernet network, hard disk option, UICC
card, 4.3” display, standard 250‑sheet tray
CS510dte USBA host port for flash drive, duplex, 802.11n wireless 5027‑630
network, Ethernet network, hard disk option, UICC
card, 4.3” display, standard 650‑sheet duo drawer with
integrated multipurpose feeder
C2132 USBA host port for flash drive, duplex, 802.11n wireless 5027‑639
network, Ethernet network, hard disk option, UICC
card, 4.3” display, standard 250‑sheet tray

The diagnostic information in this manual leads you to the correct field replaceable unit (FRU) or part. Use the
error code charts, symptom index, and service checks to determine the symptom and then repair the failure.
After you complete the repair, perform tests as needed to verify the repair.
To begin diagnosing a problem, go to “Diagnostic information” on page 33. See “Repair information” on
page 197 for information about removing and reinstalling parts. See “Parts catalog” on page 326 to help
identify parts.

Media guidelines
• “Paper guidelines” on page 24

General information
23
 5027

Paper guidelines

Paper characteristics
Selecting the appropriate media for the printer can help avoid printing problems.
For detailed information about media characteristics, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the
Lexmark Support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when
evaluating new paper stock.

Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond) grain long. Paper
lighter than 60 g/m2 might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75
g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90
g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier paper
Note: Duplex is supported only for 63 g/m2–170 g/m2 (17 lb–45 lb bond) paper.

Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can
occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it was exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing.

Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper
is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300
Sheffield points; smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes
that can degrade its performance. To condition paper before printing, store it in its original wrapper in the same
environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or
transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer
conditioning period. Excessive moisture will result in curl after printing.

Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length
of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, use
grain long paper. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2, use grain short.

Fiber content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated wood pulp. This content provides
the paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper‑feeding problems and better print quality.
Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

General information
24
 5027

Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically‑treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.4 mm
(±0.9 inch), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms:
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
• Multiple‑part forms or documents

Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 176 g/m2 weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to
withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that
are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements;
latex inks might not. When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

General information
25
 5027

Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent.
Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative
humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and
wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and
weights of paper they support.
Note: For unlisted paper sizes, select the closest larger listed size.

Supported paper sizes

Note: Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an
integrated 100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same
paper sizes as the optional 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper
sizes, types, and weights.
Paper size and Standard Manual 650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet Duplex
dimension 250‑sheet tray feeder tray mode
550‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder
A4 1 1 1 1

210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 1 2 1 2 X
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.3 in.)
A6 X X 1 X X
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2Universal is only supported in the standard 250and optional 550sheet tray if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9
mm (5.83 x 8.5 inches) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
3Universal is only supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).
4Universal is only supported in duplex mode if the width is
between 210 mm (8.27 inches) and 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
and length is between 279.4 mm (11 inches) and 355.6 mm (14 inches).

General information
26
 5027

Paper size and Standard Manual 650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet Duplex
dimension 250‑sheet tray feeder tray mode
550‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder
JIS B5 1 1 1 1 X
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
Letter 1 1 1 1

216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal 1 1 1 1

216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive 1 1 1 1 X
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
Oficio (Mexico) 1 1 1 1

216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio 1 1 1 1

216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement X X 1 X X
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
Universal X 1,3 X 1,3 X X
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Universal 1,2 1,2 1,2 4

148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3

in) to 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in).
7 3/4 Envelope X X 1 X X
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2Universal is only supported in the standard 250and optional 550sheet tray if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9
mm (5.83 x 8.5 inches) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
3Universal is only supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm

(3 x 5 inches) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).

4Universal is only supported in duplex mode if the width is between 210 mm (8.27 inches) and 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

and length is between 279.4 mm (11 inches) and 355.6 mm (14 inches).

General information
27
 5027

Paper size and Standard Manual 650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet Duplex
dimension 250‑sheet tray feeder tray mode
550‑sheet tray Multipurpose
feeder
9 Envelope X X 1 X X
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
10 Envelope X X 1 X X
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
DL Envelope X X 1 X X
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
C5 Envelope X X 1 X X
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9 in.)
B5 Envelope X X 1 X X
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
Other Envelope X X 1 X X
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.3 in.) up to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2Universal is only supported in the standard 250and optional 550sheet tray if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9
mm (5.83 x 8.5 inches) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
3Universal is only supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 inches) to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches).
4Universal is only supported in duplex mode if the width is
between 210 mm (8.27 inches) and 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)
and length is between 279.4 mm (11 inches) and 355.6 mm (14 inches).

Supported paper types and weights

Notes:
• Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper
as the 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and
weights.
• Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.

General information
28
 5027

Paper type 250‑sheet Manual 650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet Duplex mode
tray feeder tray
550‑sheet Multipurpose
tray feeder
Paper
• Plain
• Recycled
• Glossy
• Bond
• Letterhead
• Preprinted
• Colored
• Light
• Heavy
• Rough/Cotton
• Custom
Type [x]
Card stock X

Transparencies X X X

Labels X
• Paper
Envelope X X X X

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced
specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government
a study demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper.
However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of
test paper from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions.
Lexmark has found no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following
property guidelines apply to recycled paper.
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and
much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered
to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your
paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed

General information
29
 5027

Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and
paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is
required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing,
consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these
guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively
under normal printing conditions).

Data security notice

1 The printer contains various types of memory that store printer and network settings, information from
embedded solutions, and user data.
The following are the types of memory and data that they store.
• Volatile memory—The printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to buffer user data
temporarily during simple print and copy jobs.
• Non-volatile memory—The printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND
(flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, printer settings, network information,
scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
• Hard disk memory—The printer hard disk is designed for printer-specific functionality and cannot be
used for the long‑term storage of data that is not print-related. The hard disk can retain buffered user
data from complex print jobs, form data, and font data.
To erase volatile memory, turn off the printer.
To erase the non-volatile and printer hard disk memory, see “Configuration menu” on page 185.
The following parts are capable of storing memory:
• Printer control panel
• User interface controller card (UICC)
• Controller board
• Optional hard disk
Note: The control panel and controller board contain NVRAM.
2 After removing the old part, return it to your next level of support.

Tools required for service

• Flat-blade screwdrivers, magnetic, various sizes
• #1 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic
• #2 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic
• #2 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic short-blade
• 7/32 inch (5.5 mm) open-end wrench
• 7.0 mm nut driver
• Needle‑nose pliers

General information
30
 5027

• Diagonal side cutters

• Spring hook
• Feeler gauges
• Analog or digital multimeter
• Parallel wrap plug 1319128
• Twinax/serial debug cable 1381963
• Coax/serial debug cable 1381964
• Flash light (optional)
• 3 mm hex wrench

General information
31
 5027

32
 5027

Diagnostic information
• “Troubleshooting overview” on page 33
• “Fixing print quality issues” on page 35
• “Paper jams” on page 45
• “Understanding printer messages” on page 71
• “Printer hardware errors” on page 81
• “Input option hardware errors” on page 140
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before you connect or
disconnect any cable or electronic card or assembly for personal safety and to prevent damage to the
printer. Disconnect any connections between the printer and PCs/peripherals.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Troubleshooting overview
• “Performing the initial troubleshooting check” on page 33
• “Power‑on Reset (POR) sequence” on page 34
• “Using Safe Mode” on page 34

Performing the initial troubleshooting check

Before you start the troubleshooting procedures, perform the following checks:

• With the power cord unplugged from the electrical outlet, check that the cord is free from the breakage,
short circuits, disconnected wires, or incorrect connections.

• Make sure the printer is properly grounded. Check the power cord ground terminal.
• Make sure the power supply line voltage is within 10% of the rated line voltage.
• Make sure the machine is securely installed on a level surface in a well‑ventilated area.
• Make sure the room temperature is between 16 and 32°C (60 and 90°F) and that the relative humidity is
between 20 and 80%.

• Avoid sites generating ammonia gas, high temperature, high humidity (near water faucets, kettles,
humidifiers), cold spaces, near open flames, and dusty areas.

• Avoid sites exposed to direct sunlight.

• Make sure the paper is the recommended paper for this printer.
• Make a trial print with paper from a newly opened package, and check the result.

Diagnostic information
33
 5027

Power‑on Reset (POR) sequence

When you turn on the printer, it performs a POR sequence.
Check for correct POR functioning of the base printer by observing the following:
1 The LED turns on.
2 The main fan turns on.
3 The control panel turns on.
4 The fuser heater turns on.
Note: The fuser takes longer to warm up from a cold start than a warm start.
5 The control panel LED starts blinking.
6 A splash screen appears on the display. The following errors or messages may appear:
• Close Door or Insert Cartridge appears if the front access door is open or the print cartridge
is missing
• Cartridge errors, such as Defective Cartridge or Missing Cartridge
7 Ready appears on the display.
8 The main drive motor turns on.
9 The EP drive assembly drives the developer shaft located in the print cartridge.
10 The exit rollers turn.
11 The printer may begin calibration.

Using Safe Mode

Safe Mode lets the printer continue to operate in a special limited mode in which it attempts to continue offering
as much functionality as possible despite known issues.
Warning—Potential Damage: Safe Mode is intended as a short‑term workaround and should be used only in
the case of a non‑critical error when a print job must be completed before service can be arranged to repair
the printer. The printer must be returned to standard operating mode before diagnostics can be run or
full‑function printing can continue.
You can enter Safe Mode in one of the following ways:

• Enable Safe Mode from the Configuration menu, and then POR the printer.
• For 2.4” display models, press the Stop and Back keys, and then POR the printer.
• For 4.3” and 7” display touchscreen models, press the 6 and 7 keys, and then POR the printer.
Return the printer to standard operating mode to service the printer and return to full‑function printing.

Safe mode print behavior

The following table outlines the behavior for this printer model while in Safe Mode:

Diagnostic information
34
 5027

Safe Mode engine features Engine behavior Control panel behavior

Simplex printing only Reports that duplex printing is Duplex print option is not selectable.
disabled.
Ignore duplex sensor
Ignore standard bin full sensor Standard bin full messages are not Standard bin full messages will not
reported. occur.
Print at narrow media operating Pages are printed slower. N/A
point
Ignore all input options Reports that only Tray 1 is installed. Only Tray 1 and the MPF are
selectable.
Ignore all output options Does not any report installed finishing No finishing options are selectable.
options.
Ignore rear door sensor Rear door open messages are not Rear door open messages do not
reported. occur.
Reduce print speed Pages are printed slower. N/A
Reduce time to first print Slower time to first print. N/A

Fixing print quality issues

• “Initial print quality check” on page 36
• “Toner smear check” on page 36
• “Background or toner fog check” on page 37
• “Blank pages check” on page 39
• “Blurred or fuzzy print check” on page 40
• “Half‑color page check” on page 40
• “Horizontal banding check” on page 41
• “Horizontal line check” on page 41
• “Missing image at edge check” on page 41
• “Toner specks check” on page 42
• “Narrow vertical line check” on page 42
• “Random marks check” on page 42
• “Residual image check” on page 43
• “Solid color pages check” on page 43
• “Vertical banding check” on page 44
• “Light print on solids check” on page 44
• “Color problems check” on page 44

Diagnostic information
35
 5027

The symptoms described in this chapter might require replacement of one or more CRUs (Customer
Replaceable Units) designated as supplies or maintenance items, which are the responsibility of the customer.
With the customer's permission, you might need to install a developer (toner) cartridge.

Initial print quality check

Before troubleshooting specific print problems, complete the following initial print quality check:
1 Print a menu settings page, and then check the life status of all supplies. Any supplies that are low
should be replaced. Be sure to keep the original menu page to restore the customer's custom settings
if needed.
2 On the menu page, make sure the following settings are at the default level:
• Color Correction: Set to Auto.
• Print Resolution: Set to 4800 dpi (print quality problems should be checked at different resolution
settings).
• Toner Darkness: Set to 4 (default).
• Color Saver: Set to OFF.
• RGB Brightness, RGB Contrast, RGB Saturation: Set to 0.
• Color Balance: Select Reset Defaults to zero out all colors.
• Check the paper type, texture and weight settings against the paper that is loaded in the printer.
3 Inspect the image transfer unit for damage. Replace, if damaged.
4 Inspect the print cartridges for damage. Replace, if damaged.
5 If paper other than 20 lb plain letter/A4 paper is being used, load 20 lb plain letter/A4 and print the
Print Quality pages to see if the problem remains. Use Tray 1 to test print quality problems.
6 Print the Print Quality Pages (Settings>Help>Print Defects Guide/Color Quality), and then look for
variations in the print from what is expected.
7 Check to ensure the correct printer driver for the installed software is being used. An incorrect printer
driver for the installed software can cause problems. Incorrect characters could print, and the copy may
not fit the page correctly.
8 Measure all voltages from the connector to the printer ground.

Toner smear check

Leading edge

ABC
DEF
Trailing edge

Diagnostic information
36
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Change the paper
From the Paper Menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type and weight
type and paper weight settings. settings to match the
paper in the tray.
Is the paper tray set to the type and weight of paper in the tray?
Step 2 Change the textured Go to step 3.
Check for paper with texture or rough finishes. or rough paper to
plain paper and print
again.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Step 3 Go to step 4. Install the fuser
Is the fuser properly installed? properly.

Step 4 The problem is Go to step 5.

Replace the fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on page 273. solved.

Does this solve the problem?

Step 5 The problem is Contact your next
Replace the LVPS. See “Low‑voltage power supply (LVPS) solved. level of support.
assembly removal” on page 232.
Does this fix the problem?

Background or toner fog check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Reset the value. To Go to step 2.
Read the current status of the imaging unit from the customer reset this value:
menus. 1 In Ready mode,
To view the status of the photoconductor units: press Menus
a In Ready mode, press Menus 2 Select Supplies
Menu, and press
b Select Reports, and press Select
Select
c Select Device Statistics, and press Select 3 Select Replace
It is possible a new imaging unit was installed, but the counter was Supply, and
not reset. press Select
4 Select the
Has the imaging unit been recently replaced? imaging unit you
want to change,
and press Select
5 Select Yes, and
press Select
If this does not fix the
problem, then go to
step 2.

Diagnostic information
37
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the background only one of the primary colors; yellow, cyan,
magenta, or black?
Step 3 Problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Replace the developer unit.

Did replacing the developer unit correct the problem?

Step 4 Problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Replace the photoconductor unit.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 5 Replace the failing Go to step 6.
Check the high‑voltage contact from the HVPS to the image part:
transfer unit (ITU). • Image transfer
unit. See “Image
Is a problem found? transfer unit
(ITU) removal”
on page 249.
• High‑voltage
power supply
(HVPS). See
“High‑voltage
power supply
(HVPS) removal”
on page 245.
Step 6 Problem is solved. Go to step 7.
With the printer off, reset the cable in the JHVPS1 connector.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 7 Problem is solved. Go to step 8.
Replace the HVPS. See “High‑voltage power supply (HVPS)
removal” on page 245.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 8 Problem is solved. Replace the
Clean the printhead. printhead. See
“Printhead
removal” on
Does this fix the problem?
page 307.

Diagnostic information
38
 5027

Blank pages check

Check Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Remove the packing
Is all the packing material for the imaging unit in question removed? material.

Step 2 Replace the Go to step 3.

Print a document that requires all four colors with just a few developer unit for
characters to verify if one specific color is a problem. For example, the missing color.
print the Print Quality Test Pages:
a Enter Diagnostic mode.
For CS310 models, turn the printer off, press and hold Down
and Right, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons
when the installed memory and processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer off, press and
hold 3 and 6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons
when the installed memory and processor speed displays.
b Select PRINT TESTS, and press Select
c Select Prt Qual pgs, and press Select

Is only one color missing?

Step 3 Problem resolved. Go to step 4.
Replace the imaging unit. See Imaging unit (IU) removal.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Replace the main
a Remove the image unit and waste toner bottle. drive gear assembly.
See Main drive gear
b Replace the right cover and close the front door.
assembly with motor
c Enter the Diagnostics Menu, and run the appropriate cartridge removal.
drive motor test for the missing color.
d Select MISC TESTS in the Diag menu, and press Select.
e Select Motor Detect. Remove Cartridge. Press Select
appears.
Note: Do not press Select yet.
f Remove all toner cartridges and the imaging unit.
g Close the front cover. If you press Select before closing the
front cover, then a message appears: Close cover. Press
Select.
h Press Select. Motor Detection In Progress...
appears. The motor detection process takes about 10 seconds,
and stops automatically. Detect Complete.
Rebooting... appears, and the printer performs a POR
(Power On Reset).

Did the motor run?

Diagnostic information
39
 5027

Check Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6.. Clean the developer
Remove the developer unit. See Developer unit removal. Check cartridge contacts.
the developer cartridge contacts from the HVPS to the IU. See Developer unit
removal.
Are all the toner cartridge contacts clean on both the Pin and IU?
Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the HVPS.
Are all the spring‑loaded Pins in the HVPS free to move in and out See High‑voltage
with an equal amount of spring force. power supply (HVPS)
assembly removal.
Step 7 Go to step 8. Replace the cable.
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover
removal” on page 298. Check the continuity between the
spring‑loaded Pin and the JSC1 connector on the controller board.

Are all conductors continuous?

Step 8 Problem resolved. Replace the
Replace the printhead. See Printhead removal. controller board. See
Controller board
removal.
Did this fix the problem?

Blurred or fuzzy print check

Run the automatic alignment. The TPS sensor may be damaged. To run Reset Color Cal:
1 Enter the Diagnostics Menu.
For CS310 models, turn the printer off, and press and hold Down and Right.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer off, and press and hold 3 and 6.
2 Select Reset Color Cal, and press Select.
3 Select Reset Color Cal, and press Select. Resetting appears. When the reset is complete, the screen
is automatically returned to TPS Setup.
Blurred or fuzzy print is usually caused by a problem in the main gear drive assembly or in the image transfer
unit (ITU). Check the main drive gear assembly and ITU for correct operation.
Blurred print can also be caused by incorrect feeding from one of the input paper sources, media trays, or
duplex paper path.
Check the high‑voltage spring contacts to ensure they are not bent, corroded, or damaged. Replace the
high‑voltage power supply as necessary. See High voltage power supply (HVPS) assembly removal.

Half‑color page check

A photoconductor unit is not properly seated. Reset the specific photoconductor unit.

Diagnostic information
40
 5027

Horizontal banding check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Replace the Go to step 2.
Measure the distance between repeating bands. photoconductor unit.
Remove the imaging
unit and remove the
Is the distance between bands either 34.6 or 94.2 mm?
original developer
units, and then put
them back into the
new photoconductor
unit, and reinstall the
imaging unit. See
“Imaging unit (IU)
removal” on
page 252.
Step 2 Replace the fuser. Go to step 3.
See “Fuser
Does the distance measure 95 mm or 108 mm? assembly removal”
on page 273.
Step 3 Replace the ITU. See Go to step 4.
“Image transfer unit
Does the distance measure 37.7, 55, or 78.5 mm? (ITU) removal” on
page 249..
Step 4 Replace the Check the various
developers that rollers in the printer
Does the distance measure 43.9 mm or 45.5? match the missing for debris.
color (black, cyan,
magenta, or yellow.)
See Developer unit
removal.

Horizontal line check

Either the photoconductor unit or one of the developer units that make up the imaging unit is defective.
Remove and inspect the imaging unit. Replace the damaged part of the imaging unit. See Imaging unit (IU)
removal.

Missing image at edge check

Remove and reset the following:
• Toner cartridge
• Imaging unit
• Developer units

Diagnostic information
41
 5027

Toner specks check

Keep running prints through, and the problem normally clears up. If the problem persists, then replace the
developer cartridge.

Narrow vertical line check

Actions Yes No
Replace the photoconductor unit. The problem is Replace the
solved. developer unit.
Does this solve the problem?

Random marks check

Service tip: The primary cause of random marks is due to loose material moving around inside the printer and
attaching to the photoconductor unit, developer roll, or transfer belt.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Inspect the imaging Go to step 2.
unit by looking at the
Is there any loose or foreign material on the imaging unit? individual
developers and
photoconductors.
Clean or replace the
faulty unit. See
“Imaging unit (IU)
removal” on
page 252.
Step 2 Replace the Go to step 3.
developer unit.
Is there any loose or foreign material on the developer roll?
Step 3 Replace the ITU. See Contact your next
“Image transfer unit level of support.
Is there any loose or foreign material on the transfer belt? (ITU) removal” on
page 249.

Diagnostic information
42
 5027

Residual image check

Service tip: The primary cause of random marks is due to loose material moving around inside the printer and
attaching to the photoconductor unit, developer roll, or transfer belt.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Replace the imaging
Check the condition of the imaging unit using the customer menus unit or the
(administration menus): photoconductor unit.
See “Imaging unit
a At the Ready prompt, press Menu.
(IU) removal” on
b Select Supplies Menu, and press Select. page 252.
c Select Imaging Kit, and press Select.

Does the display indicate OK?

Step 2 Replace the Replace the imaging
Measure the distance from the original image to the same point on developer unit or the
the residual image. corresponding to the photoconductor unit.
color of the image. See “Imaging unit
See “Developer unit (IU) removal” on
Is the distance 43.9 mm?
removal” on page 252.
page 244.
Step 3 Replace the Go to step 4.
photoconductor.l.
Is the distance between the original image and the residual image
94.2 mm?
Step 4 Replace the fuser. Contact your next
Run the Menu Setting Page twice to clear any debris. See “Fuser level of support.
assembly removal”
a Press Menu on the control panel.
on page 273.
b Select Reports from the Admin Menu, and press Select.
c Select Imaging Kit, and press Select.

Is there still any toner contamination on the fuser assembly?

Solid color pages check

Service tip: A solid color page is generally caused by a problem in the high‑voltage power supply or an
incorrect high voltage in the printing process resulting in toner development on the entire photoconductor.

Diagnostic information
43
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Replace the photoconductor unit (part of the imaging unit). Remove
the imaging unit and remove the developers. Place the original
developers in the new photoconductor, and then replace the
imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.

Does this solve the problem?

Step 2 Replace the Go to step 3.
A faulty printhead can cause the problem. To test the printhead for printhead. See
solid colors, place a narrow strip of paper over the gap between “Printhead
the developers. Make sure the paper stays in place when you removal” on
replace the imaging unit. This will block the laser from discharging page 307.
the photoconductors. Select the Print Quality Page.

Does the uniform color page have a white vertical band?

Step 3 Replace the transfer Go to step 4.
Check the high-voltage contact from the HVPS to the contact assembly.
photoconductor charge roll. Ensure the contact springs are See “Toner
properly mounted and that the charge roll contact spring is making cartridge contacts
good contact with the HVPS spring that runs through the left printer removal” on
frame. See “Toner cartridge contacts removal” on page 254 to page 254.
view the proper mounting and for removal procedures.

Are the springs defective?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Replace the cable
Turn the printer off, and check the continuity of the HVPS cable. assembly.

Is there continuity?
Step 5 Problem is solved. Replace the
Replace the HVPS. See “High‑voltage power supply (HVPS) controller board. See
removal” on page 245. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Does this solve the problem?

Vertical banding check

Replace the developer cartridge.

Light print on solids check

Light print can be caused by incorrect media. For more information, see “Media guidelines” on page 23.

Color problems check

For more information on non‑mechanical color issues, see “Color theory” on page 359.

Diagnostic information
44
 5027

Paper jams
• “Avoiding jams” on page 45
• “Understanding jam messages and locations” on page 46
• “200 paper jams” on page 47
• “202 paper jams” on page 51
• “23y paper jams” on page 56
• “24y paper jams” on page 64
• “25y paper jams” on page 68

Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure that the paper lies flat in the tray.
• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

• Make sure that the paper guides are properly positioned.

• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Diagnostic information
45
 5027

Use recommended paper

• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the Embedded Web Server or the computer.
Note: Depending on your operating system, access the Paper menu using Local Printer Settings Utility or
Printer Settings.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam messages and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the
printer display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Note: When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, Auto does not
guarantee that the page will print.

# Jam location Message on the display What to do

1 Standard bin [x]‑page jam, clear standard Remove the jammed paper.
bin. [203.xx]
2 Fuser [x]‑page jam, open front door to clear Open the front door, pull the tab and hold the
fuser. [202.xx] fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed
paper.
3 Front door [x]‑page jam, open front door. [20y.xx] Open the front door, and then remove the
jammed paper.
4 Duplex [x]‑page jam, open front door to clear Open the front door, and then remove the
duplex. [23y.xx] jammed paper.
5 Tray [x] [x]‑page jam, open tray [x]. [24y.xx] Pull the indicated tray out, and then remove the
jammed paper.
6 Manual feeder [x]‑page jam, clear manual Remove the jammed paper.
feeder. [251.xx]
7 Multipurpose [x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose Push the paper release lever to lift the paper
feeder feeder. [250.xx] rollers, and then remove the jammed paper.

Diagnostic information
46
 5027

200 paper jams

200 paper jams

1 Pull tray 1 out.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Push tray 1 back in.

4 From the operator panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Diagnostic information
47
 5027

200 paper jam messages

Error Description Action
code
200.xx A single page of media jam at the input Go to “Input sensor (S2) jam service check” on page
(S2) sensor. 48.
Multiple pages of media are jammed at
the input sensor.
200.01 The input (S2) sensor is obstructed. Go to “Input sensor (S2) jam service check” on page
48.
200.02 The input (S2) sensor was made early. Go to “Input sensor (S2) jam service check” on page
48.
200.03 The input (S2) sensor did not make. Go to “Input sensor (S2) jam service check” on page
48.
200.05 The input (S2) sensor did not break. Go to “Input sensor (S2) jam service check” on page
48.
200.20 The staging motor has an error. Go to “Paper pick motor drive assembly service check” on
page 96.
200.21 The staging motor has an error. Go to “Paper pick motor drive assembly service check” on
page 96.
200.22 The staging motor has an error. Go to “Paper pick motor drive assembly service check” on
page 96.
201.xx A software induced stoppage has POR the printer.
occurred. This should not happen in the
field.

Input sensor (S2) jam service check

The input (S2) sensor is part of the paper pick motor drive assembly FRU, and is not available otherwise.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
a Pull out tray 1.
b Remove the jammed page(s).

Does the error clear?

Diagnostic information
48
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 2 Replace the paper Go to step 3.
Remove tray 1. pick motor drive
assembly. See
“Paper pick motor
Is the input S2 sensor flag (A) damaged?
drive assembly
standard tray
removal” on
page 295.

Diagnostic information
49
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Problem resolved. Go to step 4.
Enter Diagnostics Menu.
For CS310 models, turn the printer on, press and hold Down and
Right, and release the buttons with the installed memory and
processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer on, press and hold
3 and 6, and release the buttons with the installed memory and
processor speed displays.
Perform the Base Sensor Test. See “BASE SENSOR TEST” on
page 176.
a Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
b Select S2 Sensor, and press Select.
c Pull tray 1 out, and rotate the S2 sensor flag (A). (The S2 sensor
is located in the front of the center paper pick motor drive
assembly housing.) It should rotate freely and return to its
original position.

d Watch the display while pushing up on the flag.

Does the display indicate Media Clean and Media Present?

Diagnostic information
50
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Reseat the
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover connector.
removal” on page 298.

Is the JSP1 cable connector properly connected to the controller

board?

Step 5 Replace the paper Replace the

Turn the printer on, and check the voltage at JSP1 pin 15. pick motor drive controller board. See
assembly. See “Controller board
“Paper pick motor removal” on
Is the voltage approximately +5 V dc?
drive assembly page 300.
standard tray
removal” on
page 295.

202 paper jams

202 paper jams

Paper jam in the standard exit bin
1 Firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Diagnostic information
51
 5027

2 From the operator panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Paper jam in the fuser

1 Open the front door.
2 Open the fuser cover.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the front door.

5 From the operator panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Diagnostic information
52
 5027

202 paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
202.xx A single page of media is jammed at the exit sensor. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
Multiple pages of media are jammed at the exit page 54.
sensor.
202.01 The exit sensor is obstructed. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
page 54.
202.02 The exit sensor was made early. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
page 54.
202.03 The exit sensor did not make. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
page 54.
202.04 The exit sensor broke early. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
page 54.
202.05 The exit sensor did not break. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
page 54.
202.51 The exit sensor is obstructed. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
The fuser is past end of life. page 54.

202.52 The exit sensor was made early. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
The fuser is past end of life. page 54.

202.53 The exit sensor did not make. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
The fuser is past end of life. page 54.

202.54 The exit sensor broke early. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
The fuser is past end of life. page 54.

202.55 The exit sensor did not break. Go to “Fuser exit sensor service check” on
The fuser is past end of life. page 54.

Diagnostic information
53
 5027

Fuser exit sensor service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Replace the fuser Go to step 2.
Open the front cover. exit sensor. See
“Fuser exit sensor
removal” on
page 233.

Is the sensor dislodged or damaged?

Diagnostic information
54
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 2 Problem solved. Go to step 4.
Enter Diagnostics Menu.
For CS310 models, turn the printer off, press and hold Down and
Right, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
installed memory and processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer off, press and hold
3 and 6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
installed memory and processor speed displays)
Perform the Base Sensor Test. See “BASE SENSOR TEST” on
page 176.
a Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
b Select Fuser Exit Sensor, and press Select.
c Watch the display while rotating the flag in and out of the
sensor.

Did the sensor go from closed to open?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Reconnect the cable.
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear cover. See “Rear
cover removal” on page 298.

Is the cable correctly connected to JBIN1 on the controller board

and to the sensor?

Diagnostic information
55
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Replace the fuser Replace the
Turn the printer on, and check the values at JBIN1: exit sensor. See controller board. See
“Fuser exit sensor “Controller board
Pin 4: 0 V dc (+5 V dc during cycle)
removal” on removal” on
Pin 5: +0 V dc (unblocked), +3.3 V dc (blocked)
page 233. page 300.
Pin 6: Ground

Are the values correct?

23y paper jams

23y paper jams

1 Pull tray 1 out.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Diagnostic information
56
 5027

3 Push tray 1 back in.

4 From the operator panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

23y paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
230.xx A single page of media is jammed at the Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S1) service
inner door. check” on page 58.
Multiple pages of media are jammed at the
inner door.
230.01 The Duplex (S1) sensor is obstructed. Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S1) service
check” on page 58.
230.02 The Duplex (S1) sensor was made early. Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S1) service
check” on page 58.
230.03 The Duplex (S1) sensor did not make. Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S1) service
check” on page 58.
230.06 No media in duplexer. Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S1) service
check” on page 58.
232.xx Paper jam at input sensor. Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S2) service
check” on page 60.
232.02 The input (S2) sensor was made early while Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S2) service
duplexing. check” on page 60.
232.03 The input (S2) sensor did not make while Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S2) service
duplexing. check” on page 60.
232.05 The input (S2) sensor did not break while Go to “Duplex/manual feed sensor (S2) service
duplexing. check” on page 60.

Diagnostic information
57
 5027

Duplex/manual feed sensor (S1) service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Make sure the
Is the printer setting on a hard, flat surface? printer is setting on a
level, flat surface
Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 5.
Enter Diagnostics Menu.
For CS310 models, turn the printer off, press and hold Down and
Right, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
installed memory and processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer off, press and hold
3 and 6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
installed memory and processor speed displays).
Perform the Base Sensor Test. See “BASE SENSOR TEST” on
page 176.
a Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
b Select S1, and press Select.
c Install tray 1.

Does the display indicate InputS1‑Media Clear...?

Step 3 The sensor is Go to step 4.
Pull tray 1 out. functioning correctly.

Does the display indicate InputS1‑Media Present...?

Step 4 Remove the Go to step 5.
Remove the tray, and inspect the sensor (A). obstruction, and
restart the test.

Is there something obstructing the sensor?

Diagnostic information
58
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. Replace the tray with
Inspect the spring‑loaded shaft/flag (B) in the tray. a new one.

The flag portion of the shaft intercepts the sensor, except when a
sheet is being staged for duplexing.

Does the shaft rotate freely and return to home position (flag at top
of rotation?)
Step 6 Replace the tray. Go to step 7.
is the flag on the shaft broken?

Diagnostic information
59
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. Reconnect the cable.
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover If the problem
removal” on page 298. persists, then go to
step 8.
Verify the cable is correctly connected to JFUSES1 on the controller
board and to the sensor.

Is the sensor cable properly connected?

Step 8 Replace the duplex Replace the
Turn the printer on, and check the values at JFUSES1: sensor. See “Duplex controller board. See
sensor removal” on “Controller board
Pin 8: Ground
page 290. removal” on
Pin 9: +3.3 V dc
page 300.

Are the values approximately correct?

Duplex/manual feed sensor (S2) service check

The input (S2) sensor is part of the paper pick motor drive assembly FRU, and is not available otherwise.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
a Open the front door to access the jam area.
b Remove the jammed page(s).

Does the error clear?

Diagnostic information
60
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 2 Replace the paper Go to step 3.
Remove tray 1. pick motor drive
assembly. See
“Paper pick motor
Is the input S2 sensor flag (A) damaged?
drive assembly
standard tray
removal” on
page 295.

Diagnostic information
61
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Problem resolved. Go to step 4.
Enter Diagnostics Menu.
For CS310 models, turn the printer on, press and hold Down and
Right, and release the buttons with the installed memory and
processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer on, press and hold
3 and 6, and release the buttons with the installed memory and
processor speed displays.
Perform the Base Sensor Test. See “BASE SENSOR TEST” on
page 176.
a Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
b Select S2 Sensor, and press Select.
c Pull tray 1 out, and rotate the S2 sensor flag (A). (The S2 sensor
is located in the front of the center paper pick motor drive
assembly housing.) It should rotate freely and return to its
original position.

d Watch the display while pushing up on the flag.

Does the display indicate Media Clean and Media Present?

Diagnostic information
62
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Reseat the
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover connector.
removal” on page 298.

Is the JSP1 cable connector properly connected to the controller

board?

Step 5 Replace the paper Replace the

Turn the printer on, and check the voltage at JSP1 pin 15. pick motor drive controller board. See
assembly. See “Controller board
“Paper pick motor removal” on
Is the voltage approximately +5 V dc?
drive assembly page 300.
standard tray
removal” on
page 295.

Diagnostic information
63
 5027

24y paper jams

24y paper jams

1 Pull tray 1 out.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Push tray 1 back in.
4 From the operator panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

24y paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
242.xx A single or multiple page media jam in the 650- Go to “Tray X input sensor (S2) jam service
sheet Duo Drawer (tray 2). Multiple pages of check” on page 65.
media are jammed in the 650-sheet Duo Drawer
(tray 2).
243.xx A single or multiple page media jam in the 550- Go to “Tray X input sensor (S2) jam service
sheet Duo Drawer (tray 3). Multiple pages of check” on page 65.
media are jammed in the 550-sheet Duo Drawer
(tray 3).

Diagnostic information
64
 5027

Tray X input sensor (S2) jam service check

The input (S2) sensor is part of the paper pick motor drive assembly FRU, and is not available otherwise.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
a Clear paper path.
b Fan the media.
c Verify the proper tray settings for the media.
d Check the condition of the pick tires.
e Make sure the tray is fully inserted

Does the error clear?

Step 2 Replace the paper Go to step 3.
Remove tray 1. pick motor drive
assembly. See
“Paper pick motor
Is the input S2 sensor flag (A) damaged?
drive assembly
standard tray
removal” on
page 295.

Diagnostic information
65
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Problem resolved. Go to step 4.
Enter Diagnostics Menu.
For CS310 models, turn the printer on, press and hold Down and
Right, and release the buttons with the installed memory and
processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer on, press and hold
3 and 6, and release the buttons with the installed memory and
processor speed displays.
Perform the Base Sensor Test. See “BASE SENSOR TEST” on
page 176.
a Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
b Select S2 Sensor, and press Select.
c Pull tray 1 out, and rotate the S2 sensor flag (A). (The S2 sensor
is located in the front of the center paper pick motor drive
assembly housing.) It should rotate freely and return to its
original position.

d Watch the display while pushing up on the flag.

Does the display indicate Media Clean and Media Present?

Diagnostic information
66
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Reseat the
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover connector.
removal” on page 298.

Is the JSP1 cable connector properly connected to the controller

board?

Step 5 Replace the paper Replace the

Turn the printer on, and check the voltage at JSP1 pin 15. pick motor drive controller board. See
assembly. See “Controller board
“Paper pick motor removal” on
Is the voltage approximately +5 V dc?
drive assembly page 300.
standard tray
removal” on
page 295.

Diagnostic information
67
 5027

25y paper jams

25y paper jams

1 Pull tray 1 out.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Push tray 1 back in.

4 From the operator panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

25y paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
250.xx A single page of media is jammed in the Go to “Multipurpose feeder input sensor (S2)
multipurpose feeder. jam service check” on page 68.

Multipurpose feeder input sensor (S2) jam service check

The input (S2) sensor is part of the paper pick motor drive assembly FRU, and is not available otherwise.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
a Open tray 2 to access the jam area, and remove the jammed
page.
b Fan the media.
c Verify the proper tray settings for the media.
d Check the condition of the pick tires.

Does the error clear?

Diagnostic information
68
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 2 Replace the paper Go to step 3.
Remove tray 1. pick motor drive
assembly. See
“Paper pick motor
Is the input S2 sensor flag (A) damaged?
drive assembly
standard tray
removal” on
page 295.

Diagnostic information
69
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Problem resolved. Go to step 4.
Enter Diagnostics Menu.
For CS310 models, turn the printer on, press and hold Down and
Right, and release the buttons with the installed memory and
processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer on, press and hold
3 and 6, and release the buttons with the installed memory and
processor speed displays.
Perform the Base Sensor Test. See “BASE SENSOR TEST” on
page 176.
a Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
b Select S2 Sensor, and press Select.
c Pull tray 1 out, and rotate the S2 sensor flag (A). (The S2 sensor
is located in the front of the center paper pick motor drive
assembly housing.) It should rotate freely and return to its
original position.

d Watch the display while pushing up on the flag.

Does the display indicate Media Clean and Media Present?

Diagnostic information
70
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Reseat the
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover connector.
removal” on page 298.

Is the JSP1 cable connector properly connected to the controller

board?

Step 5 Replace the paper Replace the

Turn the printer on, and check the voltage at JSP1 pin 15. pick motor drive controller board. See
assembly. See “Controller board
“Paper pick motor removal” on
Is the voltage approximately +5 V dc?
drive assembly page 300.
standard tray
removal” on
page 295.

Understanding printer messages

• “Understanding the printer messages” on page 72

Diagnostic information
71
 5027

Understanding the printer messages

Message Action
Adjusting color Wait for the process to complete.
Change [paper source] to [custom type Try one or more of the following:
name] • Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and
Change [paper source] to [custom string] then select Finished changing paper on the printer
control panel to clear the message and continue
Change [paper source] to [paper type] printing. For non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to
[paper size] confirm.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are
specified in the Paper menu on the printer control
panel.
• Cancel the job.
Close door Make sure the right side cover is installed, and then close
the front and top doors to clear the message.
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy] You may need to order a toner cartridge. If necessary,
select Continue to clear the message and continue
printing. For non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to
confirm.
[Color] cartridge nearly low [88.xy] If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and
continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen models, press
OK to confirm.
[Color] cartridge very low [88.xy] You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. If
necessary, select Continue to clear the message and
continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen models, press
OK to confirm.
Black and color imaging kit low [84.xy] You may need to order an imaging kit. If necessary, select
Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to confirm.
Black and color imaging kit nearly low If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and
[84.xy] continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen models, press
OK to confirm.
Black and color imaging kit very low You may need to replace the imaging kit very soon. If
[84.xy] necessary, select Continue to clear the message and
continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen models, press
OK to confirm.
Complex page, some data may not have Try one or more of the following:
printed [39] • From the printer control panel, select Continue to
ignore the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to confirm.
• Cancel the current job. For non‑touch‑screen models,
press OK to confirm.
• Install additional printer memory.

Diagnostic information
72
 5027

Message Action
Configuration change, some held jobs were Held jobs are invalidated because of any of the following
not restored [57] possible changes in the printer:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• The tray for the print job is removed.
• The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer
attached to the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were
stored when the hard disk was installed in a different
printer model.
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear
the message. For non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to
confirm.
Defective flash detected [51] Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory card.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to
ignore the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB. An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB
device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub. An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the
USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Incompatible tray [x] [59] Remove, and then reinstall the indicated tray to clear the
message.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] Try one or more of the following:
[34] • Load the correct size of paper in the tray.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to
clear the message and print using a different tray. For
non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to confirm.
• Check the tray length and width guides and make sure
the paper is loaded properly in the tray.
• Make sure the correct paper size and type are
specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print
dialog.
• Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the
Paper menu on the printer control panel.
• Make sure that the paper size is correctly set. For
example, if MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then
make sure the paper is large enough for the data
being printed.
• Cancel the print job.
Insert Tray [x] Insert the indicated tray into the printer.

Diagnostic information
73
 5027

Message Action
Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Try one or more of the following:
Defragment operation [37] • From the printer control panel, select Continue to stop
the defragmentation and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to confirm.
Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were The printer deleted some held job to process current job.
deleted [37] Select Continue to clear the message. For
non‑touch‑screen models, press OK to confirm.
Insufficient memory to collate job [37] Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to print
the part of the job already stored and begin collating
the rest of the print job. For non‑touch‑screen models,
press OK to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
Insufficient memory to support Resource Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the
Save feature [35] printer control panel to disable Resource Save, clear the
message, and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press OK to confirm.
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will Try one or more of the following:
not be restored [37] • From the printer control panel, select Continue to
clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press OK to confirm.
• Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer
memory.
Load [paper source] with [custom type Try one or more of the following:
name] • Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type
Load [paper source] with [custom string] of paper.
• To use the tray with the correct paper size or type,
Load [paper source] with [paper size] select Finished loading paper on the printer control
Load [paper source] with [paper type] panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press OK
[paper size] to confirm.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct
paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If
the printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct
paper type and size, then it prints from the default
paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] Try one or more of the following:
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type • Load the feeder with the correct size and type of
name] paper.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] page, paper loaded or press OK on the printer control
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] panel to clear the message and continue printing.
[paper size] • Cancel the current job.

Diagnostic information
74
 5027

Message Action
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more
information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service
representative. If necessary, select Continue to clear the
message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press OK to confirm.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy] For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service
representative. If necessary, select Continue to clear the
message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press OK to confirm.
Maintenance kit very low [80.xy] You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon.
For more information, contact customer support at
http://support.lexmark.com or your service
representative. If necessary, select Continue to clear the
message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press OK to confirm.
Memory full [38] Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Cancel job to
clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press OK to confirm.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print
server. For more information, contact customer
support.
Network [x] software error [54] Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to
continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press to confirm.
• Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print
server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support
Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in flash memory for Try one or more of the following:
resources [52] • From the printer control panel, select Cancel job to
clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press OK to confirm.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash
memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not
previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.

Diagnostic information
75
 5027

Message Action
Non‑Lexmark [color] [supply type], see Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge or the
User’s Guide [33.xy] imaging kit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part
installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with
genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability,
or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark
supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results
if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging
component usage beyond the intended life may damage
your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Potential Damage ‑ Use
of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty
coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party
supplies or parts may not be covered by warranty. To
accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with
the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer,
press and hold Cancel and # on the printer control
panel simultaneously for 15 seconds. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press OK and Cancel
simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message and
continue printing. If you do not wish to accept these
risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from
your printer, and then install a genuine Lexmark supply
or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the
“Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
PPDS font error [50] Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to
clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press OK to
confirm.
• If the printer cannot find the requested font, then from
the printer control panel, navigate to: PPDS menu >
Best Fit > On
The printer will find a similar font and reformat the
affected text.
• Cancel the job.

Diagnostic information
76
 5027

Message Action
Reinstall missing or unresponsive Try one or more of the following:
[color] cartridge [31.xy] • Install the missing toner cartridge. For more
information, see the "Replacing supplies" section of
the User’s Guide.
• Remove the unresponsive cartridge, and then reinstall
it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the
supply, then the cartridge may be defective. Replace the
cartridge.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive black Try one or more of the following:
and color imaging kit [31.xy] • Install the missing imaging kit. For more information,
see the "Replacing supplies" section of the User’s
Guide.
• Remove the unresponsive imaging kit, and then
reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the
supply, then the imaging kit may be defective. Replace
the imaging kit.
Reload printed pages in Tray [x] Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to
clear the message and continue printing the second
side of the sheet. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press OK to confirm.
Remove packaging material, [area name] 1 Remove any remaining packing material from the
indicated location.
2 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to
clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press OK to confirm.
Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace [color] cartridge, 0 estimated Replace the indicated toner cartridge to clear the
pages remain [88.xy] message and continue printing. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then
see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide
or visit http://support.lexmark.com.

Diagnostic information
77
 5027

Message Action
Replace [color] cartridge, printer Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number
region mismatch [42.xy] of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can
have the following values:
• 0: Global
• 1: United States, Canada
• 2: European Union (EU), European Economic Area
(EEA), Switzerland
• 8: Rest of the world
• 9: Invalid
Notes:
• The x and y values are the .xy of the error code
shown on the printer control panel.
• The x and y values must match for printing to
continue.
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0 estimated Replace the indicated imaging kit to clear the message
pages remain [84.xy] and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then
see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User’s Guide
or visit http://support.lexmark.com.
Replace defective [color] cartridge Replace the defective toner cartridge to clear the
[31.xy] message. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement toner cartridge,
then see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User’s
Guide or visit http://support.lexmark.com.
Replace defective black and color imaging Replace the defective imaging kit to clear the message
kit [31.xy] and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then
see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User’s Guide
or visit http://support.lexmark.com.
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated Contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com
pages remain [80.xy] or your service representative, and then report the
message. The printer is scheduled for maintenance.
Replace missing [color] cartridge Install the indicated toner cartridge to clear the message.
[31.xy] For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
Replace missing black and color imaging Install the indicated imaging kit to clear the message. For
kit [31.xy] more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy] Replace the waste toner bottle to clear the message.

Diagnostic information
78
 5027

Message Action
Replace unsupported [color] cartridge Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported
[32.xy] one to clear the message.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then
see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User’s Guide
or visit http://support.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported black and color Remove the indicated imaging kit, and then install a
imaging kit [32.xy] supported one to clear the message.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then
see the "Ordering supplies" section of the User’s Guide
or visit http://support.lexmark.com.
Replace missing waste toner bottle Install the missing waste toner bottle to clear the
[82.xy] message. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply.
Restore held jobs? Try one or more of the following:
• Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore
all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press OK to
confirm.
• Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs
to be restored. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press OK to confirm.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear
administrator. the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your
system support person
Some held jobs were not restored From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear
the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
OK to confirm.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the
printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Standard network software error [54] Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to
continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press OK to confirm.
• Turn off the printer and then turn it back on.
• Update the network firmware in the printer or print
server. For more information, contact customer
support.

Diagnostic information
79
 5027

Message Action
Standard USB port disabled [56] From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear
the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
OK to confirm.
Notes:
• The printer discards any data received through the
USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to
Disabled.
Supply needed to complete job Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for
supplies to view all error messages that indicate what
supplies are needed to continue processing the
current job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press OK to clear the message and continue printing.
1 Order the missing supply immediately.
2 Install the supply. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
• Cancel the print job, then install the missing supply,
and then resent the print job.
Too many flash options installed [58] 1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to properly grounded
electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58] 1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3 Remove the extra trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Unformatted flash detected [53] Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to
continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press OK to confirm.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash
memory may be defective and need to be replaced.
Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy] You may need to order a waste toner bottle. If necessary,
select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the
message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press OK to confirm.

Diagnostic information
80
 5027

Message Action
Weblink server not set up. Contact system An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server
administrator. is not configured properly.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear
the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your
system support person.

Printer hardware errors

• “110 errors” on page 82
• “121 errors” on page 84
• “126 errors” on page 90
• “133 errors” on page 90
• “141 errors” on page 93
• “147 errors” on page 95
• “171 errors” on page 97
• “Procedure before starting the 9yy service checks” on page 98
• “900 errors” on page 100
• “91y errors” on page 106
• “938 errors” on page 106
• “95y errors” on page 107
• “96y errors” on page 110
• “97y errors” on page 111
• “982 errors” on page 112
• “990 errors” on page 112
• “Base printer symptoms” on page 114
• “Bin‑full/narrow media sensor service check” on page 115
• “Toner meter cycle (TMC) card service check” on page 117
• “Dead printer service check” on page 117
• “Front door sensor or switches service check” on page 119
• “Operator panel (display is dim and unchanging) service check” on page 123
• “Operator panel (displays all diamonds, no beeps, or five beeps) service check” on page 127
• “Operator panel (display blank) service check” on page 131
• “Operator panel (one or more operator panel buttons fail) service check” on page 135
• “Operator panel USB cable service check” on page 136
• “USB service check” on page 137
• “Network service check” on page 137

Diagnostic information
81
 5027

110 errors

110 error messages

Error code Description Action
110.xx The printhead <color> error. Go to “Printhead service check” on
page 83.
110.01 The printhead <color> lost HSYNC
110.02 The printhead <color> failed to complete
servo.
110.03 The printhead <color> mirror motors lost motor
lock.
110.04 The printhead <color> mirror motors lost motor
lock.
110.05 Failure reading NVRAM from printhead
110.06 The printhead <color> thermistor is open.
110.07 The printhead <color> thermistor is shorted.
110.08 The printhead <color> laser showed bad in
testing.
110.09 The printhead <color> SOS EOS measurement
did not complete.
110.10 The printhead <color> has bad SOS EOS
measurement.
110.11 Failure writing data to the printhead.
110.12 Failure reading data from the printhead.
110.13 Printhead declared error.

Diagnostic information
82
 5027

Printhead service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 The problem is Go to step 2.
POR the printer. solved.

Does this solve the problem?

Step 2 Replace the Go to step 3.
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear cover. See “Rear printhead. See
cover removal” on page 298. “Printhead
removal” on
Check the cables at JMIRR1 and JPH1 on the controller board for
page 307.
proper connection, the printhead cable for pinch points, and the
cable or connector for any other damage.

Is the cable damaged?

Step 3 Replace the Replace the

Turn the printer on, and then wait until the printer posts an error. controller board. See printhead. See
Using a voltmeter, check the following values at JMIRR1: “Controller board “Printhead
Pin 1: +5 V dc removal” on removal” on
page 300. page 307.
Pin 2: +3.3 V dc
Pin 3: +5 V dc
Pin 4: Ground
Pin 5: +24 V dc

Are the values approximately correct?

Diagnostic information
83
 5027

121 errors

121 error messages

Error code Description Action
121.xx Fuser error Go to “Fuser service check” on
page 86.
121.01 Attempting to print with estimated power at or
below minimum power.
121.02 Fuser is over temperature.
121.03 Fuser open thermistor check failed.
121.04 Attempting to print with estimated power at or
above minimum power.
121.05 Fuser failed to reach final temperature in time.
121.06 Attempting to print when the estimated power
is too low.
121.07 Timed out waiting for home sensor event
121.08 Wrong lamp bit is set in NVRAM.
121.10 Fuser failed to warm up.
121.11 Fuser under temperature error while in Go to “Fuser service check” on
standby. page 86.
121.12 Fuser under temperature error while printing.
121.13 Fuser open thermistor check failed for second
thermistor.
121.14 Fuser shorted thermistor check failed for hot
roll thermistor.
121.15 Fuser shorted thermistor check failed for
second thermistor.
121.16 Estimated power is at or above the maximum
power.
121.17 Total failure to close fuser nip.
121.26 Attempting to print with estimated power at or
below minimum power.
121.27 Fuser over temperature.
121.28 Fuser open thermistor check failed.

Diagnostic information
84
 5027

Error code Description Action

121.29 Attempting to print with estimated power at or Go to “Fuser service check” on
above minimum power. page 86.
121.30 Fuser failed to reach final temperature in time.
121.31 Fuser power is below minimum.
121.36 Fuser under temperature in standby.
121.37 Fuser under temperature while printing.
121.38 Fuser open thermistor.
121.39 Fuser shorted thermistor.
121.40 Fuser shorted thermistor.
121.42 Fuser power above maximum.
121.5x Fuser is past life and has an error. Go to “Fuser assembly removal” on
page 273.
121.6x Fuser is past life and has an error.
121.7x Fuser is past life and has an error.
121.8x Fuser is past life and has an error.
121.9x Fuser is past life and has an error.

Diagnostic information
85
 5027

Fuser service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 The problem is Go to step 2.
Some of these errors are caused by a faulty component on the solved.
LVPS. Check the history file in the printer to verify other
occurrences. If there are others, then replace the LVPS. See
“Low‑voltage power supply (LVPS) assembly removal” on
page 232.

Does this solve the problem?

Step 2 Replace the fuser Go to step 3.
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover cable.
removal” on page 298.
Check the cable at JFUSES1 for proper connection to the controller
board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for
any other damage.

Is the cable damaged?

Diagnostic information
86
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Repair or replace the Go to step 4.
Check the connector JLVPS1 for proper connection to the LVPS cable.
controller board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or
connector for any other damage.

Is the cable damaged?

Diagnostic information
87
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Repair the cables. If Go to step 5.
Open the front cover, and check the power cable (A) on the left the cables cannot be
side of the fuser. repaired, then
replace the fuser.
Remove the right cover assembly. See “Right cover assembly
See “Fuser
removal” on page 238.
assembly removal”
Check the thermistor cables and connections (B) on the right side on page 273.
of the fuser.

Are the cables or connectors damaged?

Diagnostic information
88
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. Replace the
Check the following values at JFUSES1: controller board. See
“Controller board
Pin 1: +24 V dc (door closed)
removal” on
Pin 2: +24 V dc (doors closed)
page 300.
Pin 3: +24 V dc (doors closed)
Pin 4: +24 V dc (doors closed)
Pin 5: Between 0.6 and 3.28 V dc
Pin 6: Ground
Pin 8: Ground
Pin 10: Between ‑3 and +3.3 V dc
Pin 11: Ground (no wire)

Are the values correct?

Step 6 The problem is Replace the
Replace the fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on page 273. solved. controller board. See
“Controller board
removal” on
Does the error clear?
page 300.

Diagnostic information
89
 5027

126 errors

126 error messages

Error code Description Action
126.xx Low voltage power supply did not detect zero Go to “Low‑voltage power supply
crossing. (LVPS) assembly removal” on
page 232.
126.01 Low voltage power supply did not detect zero Go to “Low‑voltage power supply
crossing. (LVPS) assembly removal” on
page 232.

133 errors

133 error messages

Error code Description Action
133.1x The black cartridge toner meter cycle (TMC) Go to “Toner meter sensors (Y, C, M, K)
switch error: on TMC card service check” on
• .11 recoverable page 91.
• .12 nonrecoverable
133.2x The cyan cartridge toner meter cycle (TMC)
switch error:
• .21 recoverable
• .22 nonrecoverable
133.3x The magenta cartridge toner meter cycle
(TMC) switch error:
• .31 recoverable
• .32 nonrecoverable
133.4x The yellow cartridge toner meter cycle (TMC)
switch error:
• .41 recoverable
• .52 nonrecoverable

Diagnostic information
90
 5027

Toner meter sensors (Y, C, M, K) on TMC card service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Repair or replace the Go to step 2.
Remove the toner cartridge, and inspect the lenses on the toner TMC card. See
meter cycle (TMC) card. “Toner meter cycle
(TMC) card
removal” on
page 240.

Are the lenses blocked, damaged, or dirty?

Diagnostic information
91
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 2 Replace the Replace the TMC
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover controller board. card. See “Toner
removal” on page 298. “Controller board meter cycle (TMC)
removal” on card removal” on
Turn the printer on, and measure the values below at JCTM1 during
page 300. page 240.
POR:
Pin 1: +5 V dc
Pin 2: +3.3 V dc
Pin 3: +3.3 V dc
Pin 4: +3.3 V dc
Pin 5: +3.3 V dc
Pin 6: Ground

Are any of the values incorrect?

Diagnostic information
92
 5027

141 errors

141 error messages

Error code Description Action
141.0x Cartridge motor error Go to “Cartridge motor error service check” on
page 94.
141.01 Failed to achieve lock for
motor within allotted time.
141.02 Time out waiting for SAP
BLDC motor to reach valid FG
speed.
141.03 Time out waiting for
MP_NUM_INITIAL_SAP_HA
LLS.
141.05 Lost lock for motor.
141.06 Excessive SAP BLDC PWM.
141.07 Motor stalled in timebased
communication.
141.2x Cyan/magenta/yellow
cartridge motor error.
141.21 Failed to achieve lock for
motor within allotted time.
141.22 Time out waiting for SAP
BLDC motor to reach valid FG
speed.
141.23 Time out waiting for
MP_NUM_INITIAL_SAP_HA
LLS.
141.24 Time out waiting for SAP
BLDC motor.
141.25 Lost lock for motor.
141.26 Excessive SAP BLDC PWM.
141.27 Motor stalled in timebased
communication.

Diagnostic information
93
 5027

Cartridge motor error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Reseat the cable.
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover
removal” on page 298.
Check the cable JCARTB1 for proper connection to the system
board.

Is the cable properly connected?

Step 2 Replace the BLDC K Go to step 3.
Check the cable for damage. image transfer unit
cable. See “Image
transfer unit (ITU)
Is the cable damaged?
removal” on
page 249.

Diagnostic information
94
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. Reseat the cable.
Remove the left cover assembly. See “Left cover assembly
removal” on page 219.
Check the cables connected to the cartridge motor assembly.

Is the cable connected properly?

Step 4 Replace the The problem is
Replace the EP drive assembly. See “EP drive assembly removal” controller board. See solved.
on page 221. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Does the problem remain?

147 errors

147 error messages

Error code Description Action
147.xx Staging motor error Go to “Paper pick motor drive assembly
service check” on page 96.
147.01 Staging motor has exceeded the ramp up
table.
147.02 Staging motor has exceeded number of
encoders at minimum PWM.
147.03 Staging motor has exceeded number of
encoders at maximum PWM.
147.04 Motor encoder count did not change between
interrupts.
147.05 Staging motor has encountered a stall time
out.

Diagnostic information
95
 5027

Paper pick motor drive assembly service check

The input (S2) sensor is part of the paper pick motor drive assembly, and is not available separately.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 The problem is Go to step 2.
Check the condition of the pick tires, and replace if necessary. See solved.
“Pick tire removal” on page 311.

Does this solve the problem?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Properly connect the
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear cover. See “Rear cables, and POR the
cover removal” on page 298. Check the table at JSP1 on the printer.
controller board for proper connection. Go to step 3.

Is the cable properly connected?

Step 3 The problem is Go to step 4.
Did the printer function correctly after reconnecting the cables? solved.

Diagnostic information
96
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Replace the paper Replace the
Turn the printer on, and then verify the following approximate pick motor drive controller board. See
values at JSP1: assembly. See “Controller board
“Paper pick motor removal” on
Pin 2: +24 V dc
drive assembly page 300.
Pin 4: +24 V dc
standard tray
Pin 5: +5 V (when paper is picked) removal” on
Pin 7: Ground page 295.
Pin 8: Ground
Pin 10: +5 V dc
Pin 12: _5 V dc (when paper is picked)
Pin 15: +5 V dc
Pin 16: Ground

Are the values approximately correct?

171 errors

171 error messages

Error code Description Action
171.01 The printer fan has stalled. Go to “Fan error service check” on page
98.

Diagnostic information
97
 5027

Fan error service check

Actions Yes No
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover Replace the fan. Replace the
removal” on page 298. controller board. See
Turn the printer on, and check the fan cable at JFAN1 for the “Controller board
following values: removal” on
page 300.
Pin 1: +3.3 V dc
Pin 2: Ground
Pin 3 0 (fan off)

Are the measured values correct?

Procedure before starting the 9yy service checks

You will need to retrieve certain information. This information will aid your next level of support in diagnosing
the problem before replacing the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not replace the controller board unless directed by your next level of
support.
1 Collect the history information and firmware logs (Fwdebug and logs.tar.gz) from the SE menu.
2 Collect the settings from the menu settings page.
3 Collect information from the user.

Diagnostic information
98
 5027

Note: Not all of the items are retrievable from the printer you are working on.

A. Collecting the history information from the SE menu

Note: Make sure that your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
1 Open a Web browser, type http://printer_IP_address/se, and then press Enter.
Notes:
• printer_IP_address is the TCP/IP address of the printer
• se is required to access the printer diagnostic information
2 Click History Information, copy all information, and then save it as a text file.
3 E-mail the text file to your next level of support.

B. Collecting the firmware logs (Fwdebug and logs.tar.gz) from the SE menu
Notes:
• Make sure that your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
• Some printers are designed to restart automatically after a 9yy error. On these printers, you can retrieve
the secondary crash code information using the SE menu.
• Fwedebugs can also be referred to as LBtrace. If FWEdebugs does not appear in the list, then look for
LBtrace. Multiple LBtrace logs can appear in the list of links referred to in step 2.
1 Open a Web browser, type http://printer_IP_address/se, and then press Enter.
2 Click List Fwedebugs captured during reboots.
Note: A list of the secondary crash codes retrieved from previous reboots will be generated. If there are
Fwedebugs listed, then click Dump Fwedebug log0, Dump Fwedebug log1, and Dump Fwedebug log2.
Clicking these links will dump the debug logs to the computer. Take note of the destination folder where
the logs are saved.
3 E-mail the logs to your next level of support.
Note: Some printer SE menus give you the option of clicking Logs Gzip Compressed. If this option is
shown in the menu, then click it and retrieve the compressed log file. Take note of the destination folder
where the log file is saved.

C. Collecting the settings from the menu settings page

Note: The menu settings page is different for each printer. For more information see the User’s Guide. Your
next level of support will tell you which page they want to see.

Copying the menu settings page from the Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Note: Make sure that your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
1 Open a Web browser, type http://printer_IP_address, and then press Enter.
2 Click Settings, and then select one of the settings pages from the links shown on the page.
3 Copy all the information, and then save it as a text file.
4 E-mail the text file to your next level of support.

Diagnostic information
99
 5027

Printing the menu settings page

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Reports > Menu Settings Page
2 Print the menu settings page, and then use Scan to E-mail to send it to your next level of support.

D. Collecting information from the user

Ask the user for information about the following:
• Print job being run
• Operating system being used
• Print driver being used
• Other information on what was happening when the 9yy error occurred

900 errors

900 error messages

Error code Description Action
900.xx Unrecoverable RIP software error/illegal Go to “System software error service
trap. check” on page 101.

Diagnostic information
100
 5027

System software error service check

Note: Make sure to perform the “Procedure before starting the 9yy service checks” on page 98 before
proceeding.
There are different types of 900.xx errors that can occur. There may be a communication problem (bad cable,
network connection, and so on) software issue, or a hardware problem with the controller board of ISP (Internal
Solutions Port). The communication and software aspects should be checked first. Determine if the problem is
constant or intermittent. use the troubleshooting procedure below to isolate the issue. Take any notes as
instructed. You will need that information in the event you need to contact your next level support.
Note: Before troubleshooting, determine the operating system used when the error occurred. If possible,
determine whether or PostScript or PCL files was sent to the device when the error occurred. Ask the
customer which Lexmark Solutions applications are installed on the device.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
POR the printer.

Does the error occur?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 6.
a Write down the exact 900.xx error code displayed on the
device.
b Turn the device off.
c Clear the print queues.
d Disconnect all communication cables, and remove all memory
options.
e Remove all ISP and modem cards.
f Restart the device into diagnostic mode.
For CS310 models, turn the printer off, press and hold Down
and Right, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons
when the installed memory and processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer off, press and
hold 3 and 6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons
when the installed memory and processor speed displays)

Does the 900.xx error occur during startup?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Check all the cables connected to the RIP board for proper
connectivity.

Are the cables properly connected?

Diagnostic information
101
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
Properly connect the cables to the RIP board. Restart the device
into diagnostic mode.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur during startup?

Step 5 Problem resolved. Go to step 31.
Replace the RIP board, and restart the device.

Does this fix the problem?

Note: If an error, different from the original 900.xx, is displayed,
then consult the service check for that error.
Step 6 Go to step 31. Go to step 7.
Print the following:
• Error log
• Menu settings page
• Network settings page

Does the 900.xx error reoccur while these pages are printing?
Step 7 Go to step 8. Go to step 10.
Reattach the communications cable. Restart the printer to
operating mode. Send the printer a print job.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Note: Before performing this step, write down this information
about the file being sent to the printer:
• Application used
• Operating system
• Driver type
• File type (PCL, PostScript, XPS, etc.)

Diagnostic information
102
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. Go to step 10.
Restart the printer to operating mode. Send a different print job to
the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 9 Go to step 31. Go to step 10.
Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of support for the
correct firmware level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode. Send the printer a print job.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 10 Go to step 11. Go to step 13.
Is the device a Multi Function Printer?
Step 11 Go to step 31. Go to step 12.
Run a copy job.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 12 Go to step 31. gO TO STEP 13.
Run a scan to PC job.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 13 Go to step 14. Go to step 16.
Is there optional memory installed?
Step 14 Go to step 15. Go to step 16.
Reinstall the memory, and send the print job to the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 15 Go to step 31. Problem resolved.
Install a Lexmark recommended memory option, and send a print
job to the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 16 Go to step 17. Go to step 21.
Is there a modem installed on the device?
Step 17 Go to step 18. Go to step 20.
Reinstall the modem, and restart the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Diagnostic information
103
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 18 Go to step 19. Problem resolved.
Upgrade the firmware if it has not been upgraded in any previous
step. Contact your next level of support for the correct firmware
level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode. Send the printer a print job.

Does the 900.00 error reoccur?

Step 19 Go to step 31. Problem resolved.
Replace the modem. Restart the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 20 Go to step 31. Problem resolved.
Replace the modem, and restart the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 21 Go to step 31. Go to step 21.
Run a fax job.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 22 Go to step 22. Problem resolved.
Are there any ISP (internal solutions port) options installed?
Step 23 Go to step 24. Go to step 26.
Upgrade the firmware if it has not been upgraded in any previous
step.
Reinstall the first ISP option, and restart the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 24 Go to step 25. Problem resolved.
Upgrade the firmware if it has not been upgraded in any previous
step. Contact your next level of support for the correct firmware
level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 25 Go to step 31. Go to step 26.
Replace the faulty ISP option, and restart the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 26 Go to step 27. Problem resolved.
Are there anymore ISP options to install?

Diagnostic information
104
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 27 Go to step 29. Go to step 28.
Install the next ISP option, and restart the device.

Does the 900.xx error occur?

Step 28 Go to step 29. Go to step 26.
Run a job to test the option.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 29 Go to step 30. Go to step 26.
Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of support for the
correct firmware level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode.

Does the 900.xx error occur?

Step 30 Go to step 31. Go to step 26.
Replace the faulty ISP option, and restart the device.

Does the 900.xx error reoccur?

Step 31
Contact your next level of support. You will need the following information for them:
• Exact 900.xx error digits and complete error message
• Printed menu settings pag
• Printed network settings page
• Device error log
• A sample print file if error appears to be isolated to a single file
• File/Application used if error is related to specific print file
• Device Operating System
• Driver used (PCL/PS)
• Frequency of the occurrence of the error

Diagnostic information
105
 5027

91y errors

91y error messages

Error code Description Action
910.xx A general engine software error. Go to “Engine software service check”
on page 106.
911.xx A general engine software error.
912.xx A general engine software error.
913.xx A general engine software error.
914.xx A general engine software error.
915.xx A general engine software error.
916.xx A general engine software error.
917.xx A general engine software error.
918.xx A general engine software error.
919.xx A general engine software error.

Engine software service check

Actions Yes No
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear coverReplace the Secure all
removal” on page 298. controller board. See connections. POR
Check the cable connections. See “Controller board removal” on “Controller board the printer.
page 300 for proper disconnecting and connecting of cables from removal” on
controller board. page 300.

Are all cable connections secure?

938 errors

938 error messages

Error code Description Action
938.01 Board level was not obtained. Go to “Controller board removal” on
page 300.
938.02 Time out waiting for bullet serial data to be
updated.
938.03 NVM_OK was not received from NV2 server
for successfully submitted request.
938.04 Over temperature condition detected.

Diagnostic information
106
 5027

95y errors

95y error messages

Error code Description Action
950.xx There is a mismatch between controller Go to “NVRAM failure service check” on
EEPROM and mirror. page 109.
• 950.00 through 950.29 codes: mismatch
between controller and mirror
• 950.30 through 950.60 codes: mismatch
between secure and controller
951.xx Error NV part on system board. Go to “Controller board removal” on
page 300.
952.xx A recoverable MVRAM Cyclic Redundancy Performing a POR will clear this error.
Check (CRC) error occurred. n is the offset at
which the error occurred.
953.xx (CS310) Go to “Operator panel removal (for
NVRAM chip failure with mirror. CS310 models only)” on page 260.
1 POR the printer.
2 If the problem persists, replace the UICC
card.
953.xx (CS410) Go to “Operator panel removal (for
NVRAM chip failure with mirror. CS410 models only)” on page 262.
1 POR the printer.
2 If the problem persists, replace the UICC
card.
953.xx (CS510) Go to “Operator panel removal (for
NVRAM chip failure with mirror. CS510 models only)” on page 265.
1 POR the printer.
2 If the problem persists, replace the UICC
card.

Diagnostic information
107
 5027

Error code Description Action

954.xx The NVRAM chip failure with controller part. Go to “Controller board removal” on
1 POR the printer. page 300.
2 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.
955.xx The Code ROM or NAND flash failed the Cyclic
Redundancy Check (CRC) check or the NAND
experienced an uncorrectable multi-bit failure.
<loc> indicates the source of the failure and
has one of the following values:
• CRC Failure: The source is a failing
package indicated by Pn where n is the
package number. This error could occur on
a controller with ROM or NAND flash and
could occur as a result of the CRC check
done when the machine is powered on.
The range of package numbers is from 0
to 15.
• Error Correction Code (ECC) Failure: The
source is a failing page indicated by Bn
where “n” is the page number. This error
occurs only if a multi-bit failure is detected
during the ECC execution. Single bit
failures will be corrected automatically and
will not result in a service error. The range
of page numbers is from 0 to 1023.
1 POR the printer.
2 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.
956.xx Controller board failure. Processor failure.
Check on .02 for fan error.
1 POR the printer.
2 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.
957.xx Controller board failure. ASIC failure.
1 POR the printer.
2 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.
958.xx Printer has performed more than 100 “shift and
reflash” operations as a result of ECC bit
corrections.
1 POR the printer.
2 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.

Diagnostic information
108
 5027

Error code Description Action

959.xx Controller verification failure of system boot Go to “Invalid firmware/controller
code. board service check” on page 110.
1 Update the firmware.
2 POR the printer.
3 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.
959.0x System hardware failure. Go to “Controller board removal” on
1 POR the printer. page 300.
2 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.

NVRAM failure service check

Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing any of the following components, replace only one
component at a time or the printer will be rendered inoperable:
For CS310 models:
• Controller board
• Operator panel with UICC card
For CS410 and CS510 models:
• Controller board
• UICC card
Replace the required component, bring the printer up in Diagnostics mode (See “Diagnostics menu” on
page 166), and verify that the problem is fixed before performing a POR.
This error indicates a mismatch between the operator panel assembly and the system board.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Replace the operator Go to step 2.
For CS310 models, has the operator panel with UICC card been panel assembly with
replaced recently? a new, and not
previously installed,
For CS410 and CS510 models, has the UICC card been replaced
UICC card.
recently?
Step 2 Replace the Go to step 3.
Has the controller board been replaced recently? controller board with
a new, and not
previously installed,
controller board. See
“Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Step 3 Problem solved. Go to step 4.
Turn the printer power off for ten or more seconds. Then, turn the
printer back on (POR the printer).

Is the error gone, and can the printer print?

Diagnostic information
109
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Problem solved.
Clear the NVRAM of the printer:
a Turn the printer power off.
b With the printer off, press and hold 6,7, and 8 on the keypad.
c Turn the printer on.
d When Restoring Factory Defaults appears, release
the buttons.
Note: If the printer looks up on the Restoring Factory Defaults,
then wait two minutes, and then turn the printer power off. After
ten seconds or more, turn the printer power back on without
holding down any buttons.

Does the error message still appear?

Step 5 Replace the Problem solved.
For CS310 models replace the operator panel with UICC card. controller board. See
“Controller board
For CS410 and CS510 models, replace the UICC card.
removal” on
page 300.
Does the error message still appear?

Invalid firmware/controller board service check

Action Yes No
Update the firmware. Replace the The problem is
Note: Contact the next level of support for the correct firmware controller board. See solved.
level. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Does the error remain?

96y errors

96y error messages

Error code Description Action
960.xx RAM memory error: RAM soldered on the Go to “Controller board removal” on
board is bad. page 300.
1 POR the printer.
2 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.
961.xx RAM memory error: slot 1 RAM is bad. Go to “Controller board removal” on
1 Check RAM in slot 2. page 300.
2 If RAM is ok, then POR the printer.
3 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.

Diagnostic information
110
 5027

Error code Description Action

962.xx RAM memory error: slot 2 RAM is bad. Go to “Controller board removal” on
1 Check RAM in slot 1. page 300.
2 If RAM is ok, then POR the printer.
3 If the problem persists, then replace the
controller board.
964.xx Download emulation cyclic redundancy The following actions may be taken:
check (CRC) failure has occurred. A 1 Disable the Download Emulation.
checksum failure detected in the emulation
2 Program the download emulation
header or emulation file.
into the code overlay SIMM again.
3 If the problem is not resolved replace
the code overlay SIMM, and
download emulation again

97y errors

97y error messages

Error code Description Action
975.xx Network error: unrecognizable network Replace the standard network card or the
port. card in the specified slot.
976.xx Unrecoverable software or error in network Go to “Controller board removal” on
or network card x. page 300.
If unable to clear the error message, then
check the following:
• If installed, then check network card for
correct installation.
• If correctly installed, then replace the
network card.
• If a network card is not installed, then
replace the controller board.
978.xx Bad checksum while programming Standard Go to “Controller board removal” on
Network or Network Card x port. page 300.
Check the following:
• Make sure you have downloaded the
code in binary mode, not ASCII.
• Reprogram the Network card.
• If the problem persists, and if installed,
then check the network card for correct
installation.
• If correctly installed, then replace the
network card.
• If a network card is not installed, then
replace the controller board.

Diagnostic information
111
 5027

Error code Description Action

979.xx Flash parts failed while programming the Go to “Controller board removal” on
Standard Network or Network Card x port. page 300.
Check the following:
• If installed, then check the network card
for correct installation.
• If correctly installed, then replace the
network card.
• If a network card is not installed, then
replace the controller board.

982 errors

982 error messages

Error code Description Action
982.xx Communications error detected by the Call the next level of support.
specified device.
Note: <device> can be one of the
following:
• Tray 2
• Tray 3

990 errors

990 error messages

Error code Description Action
990.xx This error message indicates that an Go to “Trays 2 and 3 (optional) service
equipment check condition has occurred in check” on page 113.
the specified device.
Go to the service check for the device
indicated.
Note: <device> can be one of the
following:
• Tray 2
• Tray 3

Diagnostic information
112
 5027

Trays 2 and 3 (optional) service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 4.
Are two option trays being used?
Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
If two option trays are being used, then is the 550‑sheet tray on
the bottom?
Step 3 Problem resolved. Go to step 4.
Switch the order of the trays so that the 55‑sheet tray is on the
bottom, and then print a page from both trays.

Did the pages print from both trays?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
Inspect the paperfeed pick tires on the tray that fails to pick.

Do they appear worn or damaged?

Step 5 Problem resolved. Go to step 6.
Replace the pick tires on the faulty tray, and then print a page with
media from the affected tray. See “Pick tire removal” on page
311.

Did the page print?

Step 6 Go to step 8. Go to step 7.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Check the option cable connected to JOPT1 for continuity.

Is the cable properly seated? Is there continuity?

Step 7 Problem resolved. Go to step 8.
Replace the cable, and print from both option trays.

Did the pages print from both trays?

Step 8 Go to step 9. If the 550‑sheet
Print a menu settings page. If two option trays are used, then the option failed to
650‑sheet tray will appear as tray 2, and the 550‑sheet tray will appear, then go to
appear as tray 3. step 9.
If the 650‑sheet tray
Are all of the attached option trays listed on the first page of the failed to appear, then
menu settings pages? go to step 10.

Step 9 Go to step 11. Replace the

Remove the 650‑sheet tray from the printer. Attach the 550‑sheet 550‑sheet tray.
tray directly to the printer. Print a page from the 550‑sheet tray.

Did the page print?

Diagnostic information
113
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 10 Go to step 11. Replace the
With only the 650‑sheet tray attached to the printer, print a page 650‑sheet tray.
from the 650 sheet tray.

Did the page print?

Step 11 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
removal” on
page 298.
page 300.
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure to voltages below:
JOPT1:
Pin 2: Ground
Pin 3: Ground
Pin 5: +24 V dc
Pin 6: Ground
Pin 7: +5 V dc
Pin 9: Ground
Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Base printer symptoms

Symptom Action
Dead printer service check Go to “Dead printer service check” on page 117.
Front door sensor or switches service Go to “Front door sensor or switches service check” on page 119.
check
Operator panel (display is dim and Go to “Operator panel (display is dim and unchanging) service
unchanging) service check check” on page 123
Operator panel (displays all diamonds, no Go to “Operator panel (displays all diamonds, no beeps, or five
beeps, or five beeps) service check beeps) service check” on page 127.
Operator panel (display blank) service Go to “Operator panel (display blank) service check” on page 131.
check
Operator panel (one or more operator Go to “Operator panel (one or more operator panel buttons fail)
buttons fail) service check service check” on page 135.
Operator panel USB cable service check Go to “Operator panel (one or more operator panel buttons fail)
service check” on page 135.
USB service check Go to “USB service check” on page 137.
Network service check Go to “Network service check” on page 137.

Diagnostic information
114
 5027

Bin‑full/narrow media sensor service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Repair or replace the Go to step 2.
Open the front cover, and inspect the bin-full/narrow media sensor bin-full/narrow
(A) located towards the front of the top cover assembly. media sensor. See
“Bin‑full/narrow
media sensor
removal” on
page 305.

Is the bin‑full/narrow media sensor dislodged or damaged?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Reposition or
Does the flag rotate freely? replace the flag. See
“Bin‑full/narrow
media sensor
removal” on
page 305.

Diagnostic information
115
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Problem resolved. Replace the
Enter Diagnostics Menu. controller board. See
“Controller board
For CS310 models, turn the printer off, press and hold Down and
removal” on
Right, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
page 300.
installed memory and processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer off, press and hold
3 and 6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
installed memory and processor speed displays).
Perform the Base Sensor Test. See “BASE SENSOR TEST” on
page 176.
a Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
b Select Fuser Exit Sensor, and press Select.
c Open the close the front door, and inspect the fuser exit sensor
located on the LVPS shield.
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover
removal” on page 298.
Turn the printer on, and then click the values below at JBIN1:
Pin 1: 0 V dc (+5 V dc during cycle)
Pin 2: +3.3 V dc beam blocked 0 V dc unblocked
Pin 3: Ground

Are the values correct?

Diagnostic information
116
 5027

Toner meter cycle (TMC) card service check

Actions Yes No
Perform the Base Sensor Test: Replace the toner Replace the toner
a Enter Diagnostics menu. cartridge. meter cycle (TMC)
card. See “Toner
For CS310 models, turn the printer off, press and hold Down
meter cycle (TMC)
and Right, turn the printer on, and release the buttons when
card removal” on
the installed memory and processor speed displays.
page 240.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer off, press and
hold 3 and 6, turn the printer on, and release the buttons when
the installed memory and processor speed displays.
b Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
c Select the sensor you want to test, open the toner door, remove
the corresponding toner cartridge, and press Select .
d Note whether the operator panel shows a change in state.
Note: If the reflective disk is not showing on the cartridge, then
rotate the gear clockwise to expose the reflective surface.
For additional information about the Base Sensor Test, see “BASE
SENSOR TEST” on page 176.

Does the operator panel display a change of state?

Dead printer service check

A dead printer is one which, when powered on from a known good electrical outlet, displays no indication of
power to the printer by changes to the LCD, LED, or any movement of the fan or motors. If the printer appears
dead but makes a beeping sound, check the operator panel. See “Operator panel (displays all diamonds, no
beeps, or five beeps) service check” on page 127.
If a 650-sheet Duo Drawer is installed, then remove the option and check the base printer for correct operation.
If the base printer operates correctly, replace the 650-sheet Duo Drawer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Observe all necessary ESD precautions when removing and handling the
controller board or any installed option cards or assemblies.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous voltage in
the area of the product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if
the product must receive power to perform the task.
Note: Remove any input paper-handling options from the printer.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. There may be issues
Check the AC power voltage. with the line voltage.
Inform the customer.
Is the line voltage correct?
Step 2 Replace the power Go to step 3.
cord.
Is the AC power cord damaged?

Diagnostic information
117
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.

Are the USB ground contacts attached to the USB connections on

the controller board and controller board cage?
Step 4 Problem solved. Go to step 5.
Install the USB ground contacts in the controller board.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 5 Go to step 6. Reconnect the cable
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover at JLVPS1, and then
removal” on page 298. go to step 6.

Is the LVPS cable correctly connected at JLVPS1 on the controller

board?
Step 6 Go to step 7. Problem solved.
Turn the printer off, and then on.

Does the problem persist?

Diagnostic information
118
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 7 Replace the Replace the LVPS.
Damage to the printer is possible. Be careful to touch only one controller board. See See “Low‑voltage
conductor at a time. Rest the probe against the connector to steady “Controller board power supply
it. removal” on (LVPS) assembly
page 300. removal” on
With the printer on, verify the following values at JLVPS1:
page 232.
Pin 1: +5 V dc
Pin 2: Ground
Pin 3: +5 V dc
Pin 4: Ground
Pin 5: +5 V dc
Pin 6: Ground
Pin 7: +24 V dc
Pin 8: Ground
Pin 9: +24 V dc
Pin 10: Ground
Pin 11: +24 V dc
Pin 12: Ground
Pin 16: Ground

Are the values approximately correct?

Front door sensor or switches service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Sensor, toner door, Go to step 2.
Enter Diagnostics Menu. and right doors are
okay.
For CS310 models, turn the printer off, press and hold Down and
Right, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
installed memory and processor speed displays.
For CS410 and CS510 models, turn the printer off, press and hold
3 and 6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
installed memory and processor speed displays.
Perform the Base Sensor Test. See “BASE SENSOR TEST” on
page 176.
a Select Base Sensor Test, and press Select.
b Select Front Door, and press Select.
c Open and close the front door, and observe the display.

Does the display indicate Value Closed with the door closed,
and Value Opened with the door open?

Diagnostic information
119
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 2 Replace the right Go to step 3.
Open the front door, and check the thin, tall, plastic web (pivot cover assembly. See
plate) (A) at the top right of the printer. With the other covers in “Right cover
place and closed, the web interacts with switches in the door. assembly removal”
on page 238.

Open the toner cover, and check the motion of the wed. Is the web
loose, damaged, or missing?
Step 3 Replace the top Go to step 4.
Open the toner door, and inspect the vertical web that pushes and cover assembly. See
rotates the pivot plate. “Top cover
assembly removal”
on page 302.

Is it damaged?

Diagnostic information
120
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Replace the right Go to step 5.
With the front cover open, inspect the two switches. Using a tool, cover assembly. See
such as a spring hook, push the metal arms (C) to check the “Right cover
movement. assembly removal”
on page 238.

Is there any damage to the switches or the surrounding area?

Diagnostic information
121
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. Replace the
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover controller board. See
removal” on page 298. Turn the printer on, and verify the following “Controller board
values at JINT1 and JCVR1. removal” on
page 300.
JINT1
Pin 1: +5 V dc
Pin 2: Ground
JCVR1
Pin 1: +24 V dc

Are the values approximately correct?

Step 6 Contact your next Replace the front
Close the front cover and the toner door. Be sure that the right level or support. cover assembly. See
cover is in place. Turn the printer off, and then disconnect the “Front cover
cables at JINT1 and JCVR1. assembly removal”
on page 258.
Test continually at the connector under the following conditions:
• With the front cover and toner door closed: Test pin 1 and pin
3 at JINT1 cable end, and pin 1 and pin 2 at JCVR1 cable end.
• With one or both doors open: Pin 2 and 3 at JINT1 cable end
should indicate continuity, but pins 1 and 2 at JCVR1 should
have no continuity.

Are the tests verified?

Diagnostic information
122
 5027

Operator panel (display is dim and unchanging) service check

Replace one of the following components, and perform a POR before replacing a second component. Never
replace both of the components without performing a POR after installing each one, or the printer will be
rendered inoperable.
For CS310 models:
• Controller board
• Operator panel with UICC card
For CS410 and CS510 models:
• Controller board
• UICC card
Warning—Potential Damage: Never install and remove components listed above as a method of
troubleshooting components. Once a component has been installed in a printer, and the printer is powered
on, it cannot be used in another printer. It must be returned to the manufacturer.
For CS310 models:

Diagnostic information
123
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Replace the operator
Enter the Diagnostics Menu (turn the printer off, press and hold Up panel. See
and Down, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when “Operator panel
the installed memory and processor speed displays). removal (for CS310
models only)” on
Perform the Panel Test. See “Panel Test” on page 172.
page 260.

Did all the pixels come on?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS310 models only)” on page 260.

Is the operator panel cable properly installed at JOP1 on the

controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 3 Replace the Problem resolved.

Replace the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for controller board. See
CS310 models only)” on page 260. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Is the operator panel still dim and unchanging?

For CS410 models:

Diagnostic information
124
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Replace the display
Enter the Diagnostics Menu (turn the printer off, press and hold 3 and UICC card. See
and 6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the “Operator panel
installed memory and processor speed displays). removal (for CS410
models only)” on
Perform the Panel Test. See “Panel Test” on page 172.
page 262.

Did all the pixels come on?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS410 models only)” on page 262.

Is the operator panel cable properly installed at JLCD2 on the

controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 3 Replace the Problem resolved.

Replace the UICC card with display. See “Operator panel removal controller board. See
(for CS410 models only)” on page 262. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Is the operator panel still dim and unchanging?

For CS510 models:

Diagnostic information
125
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 4.
Enter the Diagnostics Menu (turn the printer off, press and hold 3
and 6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the
installed memory and processor speed displays).
Perform the Panel Test. See “Panel Test” on page 172.

Did all the pixels come on?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS510 models only)” on page 265.

Is the operator panel cable properly installed at JLCD2 on the

controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Reinstall the cable.

Check the UICC card to display cable.

Is the display cable installed at the UICC card correctly?

Diagnostic information
126
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Problem resolved.
Replace the display. See “Operator panel removal (for CS510
models only)” on page 265.

Is the operator panel still dim and unchanging?

Step 5 Replace the Problem resolved.
Replace the UICC card. See “Operator panel removal (for CS510 controller board. See
models only)” on page 265. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Is the operator panel still dim and unchanging?

Operator panel (displays all diamonds, no beeps, or five beeps) service

check
Replace one of the following components, and perform a POR before replacing a second component. Never
replace both of the components without performing a POR after installing each one, or the printer will be
rendered inoperable.
For CS310 models:
• Controller board
• Operator panel with UICC card
For CS410 and CS510 models:
• Controller board
• UICC card
Warning—Potential Damage: Never install and remove components listed above as a method of
troubleshooting components. Once a component has been installed in a printer, and the printer is powered
on, it cannot be used in another printer. It must be returned to the manufacturer.
For CS310 models:

Diagnostic information
127
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS310 models only)” on page 260.

Is the operator panel cable properly installed at JOP1 on the

controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 2 Problem solved. Replace the

Replace the operator panel assembly. See “Operator panel controller board. See
removal (for CS310 models only)” on page 260. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Does the operator panel display all diamonds?

For CS410 models:

Diagnostic information
128
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS410 models only)” on page 262.

Is the operator panel cable properly installed at JLCD2 on the

controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 2 Replace the Problem resolved.

Replace the UICC card with display. See “Operator panel removal controller board. See
(for CS410 models only)” on page 262. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Does the operator panel display all diamonds?

For CS510 models:

Diagnostic information
129
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS510 models only)” on page 265.

Is the operator panel cable properly installed at JLCD2 on the

controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Reinstall the cable.

Check UICC card to display cable.

Is the display cable installed at the UICC card correctly?

Step 3 Replace the Problem resolved.
Replace the UICC card with display. See “Operator panel removal controller board. See
(for CS510 models only)” on page 265. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Does the operator panel display all diamonds?

Diagnostic information
130
 5027

Operator panel (display blank) service check

Replace one of the following components, and perform a POR before replacing a second component. Never
replace both of the components without performing a POR after installing each one, or the printer will be
rendered inoperable.
For CS310 models:
• Controller board
• Operator panel with UICC card
For CS410 and CS510 models:
• Controller board
• UICC card
Warning—Potential Damage: Never install and remove components listed above as a method of
troubleshooting components. Once a component has been installed in a printer, and the printer is powered
on, it cannot be used in another printer. It must be returned to the manufacturer.
Note: The printer has detected a problem with the controller board, the operator panel assembly cable
(part of the front cover assembly), or the operator panel assembly if POST does not complete. The
printer emits five beeps, and sticks in a continuous pattern until the printer is turned off.
For CS310 models:

Diagnostic information
131
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS310 models only)” on page 260.

Is the operator panel assembly cable properly installed at JOP1 on

the controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 2 Replace the Problem resolved.

Replace the operator panel assembly. See “Operator panel controller board. See
removal (for CS310 models only)” on page 260. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Is the operator panel still blank?

For CS410 models:

Diagnostic information
132
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS410 models only)” on page 262.

Is the operator panel assembly cable properly installed at JLCD2

on the controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 2 Replace the Problem resolved.

Replace the UICC card with display. See “Operator panel removal controller board. See
(for CS410 models only)” on page 262. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Is the operator panel still blank?

For CS510 models:

Diagnostic information
133
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Reinstall the cable.
Turn the printer off.
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for
CS510 models only)” on page 265.

Is the operator panel assembly cable properly installed at JLCD2

on the controller board and the operator panel assembly?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Reinstall the cable.

Replace the UICC card to display cable.

Is the display cable installed at the UICC card correctly?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Problem resolved.
Replace the display. See “Operator panel removal (for CS510
models only)” on page 265.

Is the operator panel still blank?

Diagnostic information
134
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Replace the Problem resolved.
Replace the UICC card. See “Operator panel removal (for CS510 controller board. See
models only)” on page 265. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Is the operator panel still blank?

Operator panel (one or more operator panel buttons fail) service check
Replace one of the following components, and perform a POR before replacing a second component. Never
replace both of the components without performing a POR after installing each one, or the printer will be
rendered inoperable.
For CS310 models:
• Controller board
• Operator panel with UICC card
For CS410 models and CS510 models:
• Controller board
• UICC card
Warning—Potential Damage: Never install and remove components listed above as a method of
troubleshooting components. Once a component has been installed in a printer, and the printer is powered
on, it cannot be used in another printer. It must be returned to the manufacturer.
For CS310 models:
Actions Yes No
Enter Diagnostics Menu (turn the printer off, press and hold Up and Replace the operator Problem resolved.
Down, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the panel assembly. See
installed memory and processor speed displays). Perform the “Operator panel
Panel Test. See “Panel Test” on page 172. The Panel Test should removal (for CS310
show alternating display of all pixels on, and all pixels off. Press models only)” on
Stop to end the test. page 260.

Did the test show errors on the display?

For CS410 models:

Actions Yes No
Enter Diagnostics Menu (turn the printer off, press and hold 3 and Replace the UICC Problem resolved.
6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the card with display.
installed memory and processor speed displays). See “Operator
Perform the Button Test. See “Button Test” on page 172 in the panel removal (for
Diagnostics menu. CS410 models
only)” on page 262.
Did any of the buttons fail the test?

For CS510 models:

Diagnostic information
135
 5027

Actions Yes No
Enter Diagnostics Menu (turn the printer off, press and hold 3 and Replace the UICC Problem resolved.
6, turn the printer on, and then release the buttons when the card. See “Operator
installed memory and processor speed displays). panel removal (for
Perform the Button Test. See “Button Test” on page 172 in the CS510 models
Diagnostics menu. only)” on page 265.

Did any of the buttons fail the test?

Operator panel USB cable service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Reseat the USB
Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298. cable.

Is the cable properly seated in the controller board?

Step 2 Problem resolved. Replace the

Replace the USB cable. See “USB port connector removal” on controller board. See
page 269. “Controller board
removal” on
page 300.
Is the problem fixed?

Diagnostic information
136
 5027

USB service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Properly connect the
Is the USB cable properly connected to the printer and host PC? cable at both ends.

Step 2 Issue fixed. Go to step 3.

Try a different USB cable.

Does this fix the issue?

Step 3 Replace the There is an issue
Connect a different device to the USB cable. controller board. See with the host
“Controller board machine.
removal” on
Did the host PC see the device?
page 300.

Network service check

Note: Before starting this service check, print out the network setup page. This page is found under
Menu>Reports>Network Settings. Consult the network administrator to verify that the physical and
wireless network settings displayed on the network settings page for the device are properly
configured. If a wireless network is used, then verify that the printer is in range of the host computer or
wireless access point, and there is no electronic interference. Have the network administrator verify that
the device is using the correct SSID, and wireless security protocols. For more network troubleshooting
information, consult the Lexmark Network Setup Guide.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. If the Go to step 2.
If the device is physically connected to the network, verify that the network is wireless,
Ethernet cable is properly connected on both ends. then go to step 3.

Is the cable properly connected?

Step 2 Problem solved. Go to step 3.
Connect the Ethernet cable.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Check the printer’s online status under Printers and Faxes on the
host computer. Delete all print jobs in the print queue.

Is the printer online and in a Ready state?

Step 4 Problem resolved. Go to step 5.
Change the printer status to online.

Did this fix the issue?

Diagnostic information
137
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 10. Go to step 6.
Does the IP address displayed on the network settings page match
the IP address in the port of the drivers using the printer?
Step 6 Go to step 7. Go to step 9.
Does the LAN use DHCP?
Note: A printer should use a static IP address on a network.
Step 7 Go to step 8. Go to step 9.
Are the first two segments of the IP address 169.254?
Step 8 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
POR the printer.

Did this resolve the issue?

Step 9 Problem fixed. Go to step 10.
Reset the address on the printer to match the IP address on the
driver.

Did this resolve the issue?

Step 10 Go to step 12. Go to step 11.
Have the network administrator verify that the printer and PC’s IP
address have identical subnet addresses.

Are the subnet addresses the same?

Step 11 Problem resolved. Go to step 12.
Using the subnet address supplied by the network administrator,
assign a unique IP address to the printer.
Note: The printer IP address should match the IP address on the
printer driver.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 12 Go to step 13. Go to step 15.
Is the device physically connected (Ethernet cable) to the network?
Step 13 Problem solved. Go to step 14.
Try using a different Ethernet cable.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 14 Replace the Contact the network
Have the network administrator check the network drop for activity. controller board. See administrator.
“Controller board
removal” on
Is the network drop functioning properly?
page 300.
Step 15 Go to step 17. Go to step 16.
Is the printer on the same wireless network as the other devices?

Diagnostic information
138
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 16 Problem resolved. Go to step 17.
Assign the correct wireless network to the printer.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 17 Go to step 18. Contact the network
Are the other devices on the wireless network communicating administrator.
properly?
Step 18 Go to step 20. Go to step 19.
Verify that the wireless card is properly seated on the controller
board.

Is the wireless card seated correctly?

Step 19 Problem resolved. Go to step 20.
Properly reseat the wireless card.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 20 Go to step 22. Go to step 21.
If there is an attached antenna, is the antenna damaged?
Step 21 Problem resolved. Go to step 22.
Replace the antenna.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 22 Problem resolved. Go to step 24.
Verify that the antenna is properly connected to the wireless card.

Is it connected correctly?
Step 23 Problem resolved. Go to step 24.
Properly connect the antenna.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 24 Problem resolved. Go to step 25.
Replace the wireless card.

Did this fix the problem?

Step 25 Problem resolved. Contact your next
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support.
page 300.

Did this fix the problem?

Diagnostic information
139
 5027

Input option hardware errors

• “550‑sheet and 650‑sheet trays input option symptoms” on page 140
• “Tray (x) sensor service check” on page 141
• “Option and media size not recognized service check” on page 142
• “Double feed and printout skewed service check” on page 144
• “Failed to load/feed from multipurpose feeder service check” on page 147
• “Failed to feed from option tray and leading edge damaged service check” on page 149
• “Tray 2 or tray 3 not detected service check” on page 152
• “Tray 2 or tray 3 missing service check” on page 154
• “Tray 2 or tray 3 empty service check” on page 157
• “Incompatible tray 3 service check” on page 159

550‑sheet and 650‑sheet trays input option symptoms

Symptom Action
Printer fails to recognize the option is Go to “Option and media size not recognized service check” on
installed. page 142.
Tray X does not recognize the media Go to “Option and media size not recognized service check” on
size loaded. page 142.
Tray missing message appears even if Go to “Tray (x) sensor service check” on page 141.
media tray is installed.
Media tray does not fit in the drawer.
Double feed Go to “Double feed and printout skewed service check” on page 144.
Printout is skewed. Go to “Double feed and printout skewed service check” on page 144.
Failed to feed from input option tray. Go to “Failed to feed from option tray and leading edge damaged
service check” on page 149.
Leading edge damaged. Go to “Failed to feed from option tray and leading edge damaged
service check” on page 149.
Failed to feed from multipurpose feeder. Go to “Failed to load/feed from multipurpose feeder service check” on
page 147.
Load multipurpose feeder with plain Go to “Failed to load/feed from multipurpose feeder service check” on
paper letter. page 147.
Paper input tray missing (tray 2 or tray Go to “Tray 2 or tray 3 missing service check” on page 154.
3).
Tray 2 or tray 3 not detected. Go to “Tray 2 or tray 3 not detected service check” on page 152.
Input option tray 2 or 3 empty. Go to “Tray 2 or tray 3 empty service check” on page 157.
Incompatible tray 3. Go to “Incompatible tray 3 service check” on page 159.

Diagnostic information
140
 5027

Tray (x) sensor service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a POR the printer.
b Reseat the printer from the input option. Make sure it is installed
correctly.
c Make sure the input option configuration is supported for that
printer. Refer to the Input Option Configuration Guide.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 5.
When the printer is in Ready state, pull the standard tray out. The
display should indicate Tray (x) Missing. Reinsert the tray.

Does the message remain on the display?

Step 3 Replace the tray. Go to step 4.
Check the vertical wall at the right rear of the tray for damage.

Is the tray damaged?

Step 4 Replace the option Contact the next
Check for a dislodged tray present sensor. tray present sensor. level of support.
• If the 650‑sheet
Is the sensor dislodged? tray is affected,
then replace the
650‑sheet
drawer assembly.
• If the 550‑sheet
drawer assembly
is affected, then
replace the entire
550‑sheet
drawer assembly.
Step 5 Go to step 6. Problem resolved.
Does the message Tray (x) Missing fail to appear when the
tray is pulled out?

Diagnostic information
141
 5027

Actions Yes No
Step 6 Problem resolved. Replace the
a Turn off the printer. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
removal” on
page 298.
page 300.
c Disconnect the cable at JTRAY1 connector for tray 1 or JOPT1
for tray 2 and 3 on the controller board.
d Turn the printer on, and measure the following voltages:
For tray 1, check JTRAY1 on the controller board for +5 Vdc on
pin 1, +5 Vdc on pin 2, and GND on pin 3.
For tray 2 or 3, check JOPT1 on the controller board for GND
on pin 2, GND on pin 3, and +24 Vdc on pin 5.

Are the voltage values approximately correct?

Option and media size not recognized service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a POR the printer.
b Reseat the printer from the input option and make sure it is
installed correctly.
c Make sure the input option configuration is supported for that
printer. Refer to the Input Option Configuration Guide.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
c Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.
d Run a continuous feed test (feed at least 5 pages).

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
b Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Diagnostic information
142
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 311.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?

Diagnostic information
143
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 300.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Double feed and printout skewed service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Fan the media.
b Verify the proper tray settings for the media.
c Check the condition of the multipurpose feeder pick tires.
d Make sure the tray is fully inserted.
e Make sure the paper tray guides are set correctly.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?

Diagnostic information
144
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
c Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.
d Run a continuous feed test (feed at least 5 pages).

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
b Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 311.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?

Diagnostic information
145
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 300.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Diagnostic information
146
 5027

Failed to load/feed from multipurpose feeder service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Make sure the 650 input option tray is at tray 2.
b Make sure the correct 650 tray is inserted on the options
drawer.
c Fan the media.
d Verify the proper tray settings for the media.
e Verify the input source.
f Check the condition of the multipurpose feeder pick tires.
g Make sure the tray is fully inserted.
h Refer to media specifications and check the condition of the
media.
i Make sure the media is free from damage and defects.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
c Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.
d Run a continuous feed test (feed at least 5 pages).

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
b Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Diagnostic information
147
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 311.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?

Diagnostic information
148
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 300.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Failed to feed from option tray and leading edge damaged service check
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Fan the media.
b Verify the proper tray settings for the media.
c Verify the input source.
d Check the condition of the multipurpose feeder pick tires.
e Make sure the tray is fully inserted.
f Refer to media specifications and check the condition of the
media.
g Make sure the media is free from damage and defects.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?

Diagnostic information
149
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
c Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.
d Run a continuous feed test (feed at least 5 pages).

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
b Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 311.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?

Diagnostic information
150
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 300.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Diagnostic information
151
 5027

Tray 2 or tray 3 not detected service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a POR the printer.
b Reseat the input options.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
c Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.
d Run a continuous feed test (feed at least 5 pages).

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
b Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Diagnostic information
152
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 311.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
• Top and bottom autoconnector sheet drawer.

• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Diagnostic information
153
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 300.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Tray 2 or tray 3 missing service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a POR the printer.
b Reseat the input options.
c Reinsert the paper input tray.
d Check if the option paper pick assembly can go down and
trigger manually.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
c Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.
d Run a continuous feed test (feed at least 5 pages).

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Diagnostic information
154
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
b Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 311.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
• Top and bottom autoconnector sheet drawer.

• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Diagnostic information
155
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 300.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Diagnostic information
156
 5027

Tray 2 or tray 3 empty service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Add media on the paper tray.
b Properly set the paper restraints on the paper tray.
c POR the printer.
d Reseat the input option tray from the printer.
e Refer to the media specifications and check the condition of
the media.
f Make sure the media is free from damage and defects.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
c Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.
d Run a continuous feed test (feed at least 5 pages).

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
b Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Diagnostic information
157
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 311.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?

Diagnostic information
158
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 300.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Incompatible tray 3 service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Make sure the correct input option tray is installed in its proper
tray slot. The 650 input option tray should be in tray 2, and the
550 input option tray should be in tray 3.
b Reseat the input options from the printer.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?

Diagnostic information
159
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
c Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.
d Run a continuous feed test (feed at least 5 pages).

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Bring the printer into the Diagnostics Menu.
b Navigate to Feed Test > Tray # > Single Feed Test.

Does the feed test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 311.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?

Diagnostic information
160
 5027

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 300.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Diagnostic information
161
 5027

162
 5027

Service menus
• “Understanding the printer control panel” on page 163
• “Diagnostics menu” on page 166
• “Configuration menu” on page 185
• “Entering invalid engine mode” on page 195
• “Entering recovery mode” on page 195
• “Accessing the Network SE menu” on page 196
• “Accessing the service engineer (SE) menu” on page 196

Understanding the printer control panel

• “Using the printer control panel” on page 163
• “Understanding the colors of the indicator light and Sleep button lights” on page 165
The printer control panel is used to navigate through printer menus and to control printer settings.

Using the printer control panel

CS310

# Item Description
1 Menus button This button opens the menus.
Notes:
• The menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
• Pressing the button while in a menu item lets you return to the top level menu
screen.
2 Display This display allows the user to view printing options as well as status and error messages.

Service menus
163
 5027

# Item Description
3 Sleep button This button enables sleep mode or hibernation mode.
Notes:
• Pressing any hard button, sending a print job, or performing a poser on reset with
the main power switch wakes the printer from Sleep mode
• Pressing the Sleep button or performing a power on reset with the main power
switch wakes the printer from Hibernation mode.
4 Stop button This button stops printer activity.
5 Right arrow This button scrolls through the menus or moves between screens and menu options. This
button button also increases the numeric value of an option or setting being displayed.
6 Select button The button selects menus options and saves settings.
7 Left arrow This button scrolls through the menus or moves between screens and menu options. This
button button also decreases the numeric value of an option or setting being displayed.
8 Back button This button returns to the previous screen.
9 Indicator light This light determines the status of the printer.

CS410

# Item Description
1 Display The display allows the user to view the printer’s status and to set up and operator the printer.
2 Select button This button selects menu options and saves settings.
3 Arrow buttons These buttons are used to scroll through menus or settings on the display.
4 Keypad The keypad allows the user to enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5 Sleep button This button enables Sleep mode or hibernation mode.
Notes:
• Pressing any hard button, attaching a device to a USB port, sending a print job, or
performing a power‑on reset with the main power switch wakes the printer from Sleep
mode.
• Pressing the Sleep button or the power switch will cause the printer to wake from
Hibernation mode.
6 Stop button This button stops all printer activity.

Service menus
164
 5027

# Item Description
7 Back button This button returns to the previous screen.
8 Home button This button goes to the home screen.
9 Indicator light This light determines the status of the printer.
10 USB port The USB port connects a camera or flash drive to the printer.

CS510

# Item Description
1 Display The display shows the status of the printer and sets up and operates the printer.
2 Home button This button goes to the home screen.
3 Keypad The keypad allows the user to enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
4 Sleep button This button enables Sleep mode or hibernation mode.
Notes:
• Pressing any hard button, touching the printer control panel, attaching a device to the
USB port, sending a print job, or performing a power‑on reset with the main power
switch wakes the printer from Sleep mode.
• Pressing the Sleep button or the power switch causes the printer to wake from
hibernation mode.
5 Stop button This button stops all printer activity.
6 Indicator light This light determines the status of the printer.
7 USB port The USB port connects a USB or flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB supports flash drives.

Understanding the colors of the indicator light and Sleep button lights
The colors of the indicator light and Sleep button lights on the printer operator panel signify a certain printer
status or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in hibernation mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.

Service menus
165
 5027

Solid green The printer is on, but idle.

Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.

Sleep button light Printer status

Off The printer is idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is waking from entering hibernation mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes completely off for The printer is in hibernation mode.
1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.

Diagnostics menu
• “Entering diagnostics mode” on page 166
• “REGISTRATION” on page 167
• “Skew” on page 168
• “Quick Test” on page 168
• “Alignment Menu” on page 169
• “MISC TESTS” on page 170
• “PRINT TESTS” on page 171
• “Feed Tests” on page 171
• “Print quality test pages” on page 172
• “HARDWARE TESTS” on page 172
• “DUPLEX TESTS” on page 173
• “INPUT TRAY TESTS” on page 176
• “BASE SENSOR TEST” on page 176
• “DEVICE TESTS” on page 177
• “PRINTER SETUP” on page 178
• “EP SETUP” on page 181
• “TPS Setup: Right or Left” on page 181
• “TPS Setup: Reset Color Cal” on page 182
• “TPS Setup: Cal Ref Adj” on page 182
• “REPORTS” on page 182
• “EVENT LOG” on page 183
• “Exit Diagnostics” on page 184

Entering diagnostics mode

For CS310 models:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Press and hold Left and OK.
3 Turn on the printer.

Service menus
166
 5027

4 Release the buttons when the installed memory and processor speed displays.
5 Select Exit Diags to exit Diagnostics mode.
For CS410 and CS510 models:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Press and hold 3 and 6.
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Release the buttons when the installed memory and processor speed displays.
5 Select Exit Diags to exit Diagnostics mode and return to the printer home screen.

REGISTRATION
Print registration makes sure the black printing plane is properly aligned on the page. This is one of the steps
in aligning a new printhead. It is also the first step in aligning the duplex registration. See “Quick Test” on
page 168.
To set Registration:
1 Select Registration from the Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Use Left or Right to select Print Quick Test, and press Select.
See “Quick Test” on page 168 for addition information.
The message Printing... appears on the display, and the page prints.
Retain this page to determine the changes you need to make to the margin settings.
3 Press Select to enter the Registration.
4 Use Left or Right to select the margin setting you need to change, and press Select.
5 Use Left to decrease or Right to increase the offset values, and press Select to confirm the value. The
message Submitting changes displays, and the original margin setting screen appears.
The print registration ranges are:
Description Value Direction of change
Top margin -50 to +50 A positive change moves the image down the
Each increment corresponds to 8 scans at a page and increases the top margin. A
600 dpi scan rate (0.0133 inches or 0.339 negative change moves the image up and
mm). decreases the top margin. No compression or
expansion occurs.
The default is 0.
Bottom margin -25 to +25 A positive offset moves text down the page
Each increment causes approximately 0.55 and narrows the bottom margin, while a
mm shift in the bottom margin. negative offset moves text up the page and
narrows the bottom margin. The image is
The default is 0.
compressed or expanded.
Left margin -25 to +25 A positive change moves the image to the left,
Each increment corresponds to 4 pixels at and a negative change moves the image to
600 dpi (0.00666 in. or 0.1693 mm). the right.
The default is 0.

Service menus
167
 5027

Right margin -50 to +50 A positive change moves the image to the left,
Each increment corresponds to an and a negative change moves the image to
approximate shift of 4 pixels at 600 dpi. the right.
The default is 0.
Skew -100 to +100 A positive value causes the left end of the
Each increment corresponds to 1/1200 of an scan line to move down the page. A negative
inch. value causes the left end of the scan line to
move up the page. The right end stays fixed.
The default is 0.
There is no compression or expansion of the
image.

6 Print another copy of the Quick Test to verify your changes.

7 Continue changing the settings by repeating steps 3 through 5.
To exit Registration, press Back or Stop.

Skew
One printhead houses the four color planes. The black plane is aligned to the printer, and the other color planes
are internally aligned to black. Electronic alignment fine tunes the alignment of the color planes to the black
plane once the printhead is installed. See “Setting alignment for color” on page 169 for instructions on setting
printhead alignment. This must be performed before color skew adjustment is attempted. The following
illustration shows proper alignment versus skewed alignment.

Quick Test
The Quick Test contains the following information:
• Print registration settings
• Alignment diamonds at the left, right, top, and bottom
• Horizontal lines to check for skew
• General printer information, including current page count, installed memory, serial number, and code level

Service menus
168
 5027

To print the Quick Test page:

Note: Print the Quick Test Page on letter or A4 paper.
1 Select Registration from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Quick Test Page, and press Select.
The message Printing... appears on the display.
Once the Quick Test Page completes printing, the Registration screen displays again.

Alignment Menu
Use the alignment menu to align the image on the page for cyan, yellow, and magenta. The black image should
be aligned using REGISTRATION before the individual colors are aligned.
Warning—Potential Damage: Read the instructions for the alignment carefully.

Setting alignment for color

1 From the Diagnostics menu, touch Alignment Menu.
2 Select CYAN, YELLOW, or MAGENTA.

Service menus
169
 5027

3 Touch Quick Test. You may need to scroll to the next page.
A two-page instruction sheet prints.
The printer prints the test page from the default paper source, however if the default source only supports
envelopes, then the page prints from Tray 1. Print on A4 or letter paper for the best results.
4 Determine which settings to change and follow the instructions on the printed sheets to determine the
adjustment.
Description Range
Top Margin -128 to +127
Left Margin -1200 to +1200
Right Margin -1200 to +1200
Skew ‑50 to +50
Bow ‑50 to +50
Linearity Linearity has a separate Quick Test sheet and adjustment instructions.

5 Touch (-) to decrease the value or (+) to increase the value. After the value appears, touch to save the value
or Back to cancel.
6 Reprint the Quick Test to evaluate the changes. Continue until each adjustment is correct.
7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 as needed.
8 Continue until all three colors are aligned. A separate Quick Test prints for each color.
9 Touch Back to exit the Alignment Menu

MISC TESTS

Motor Detect
This test initiates an automatic motor detection process that should be performed whenever the controller
board is replaced.
To run Motor Detect:
1 Remove the imaging unit and the waste toner bottle. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
2 Reinstall the right cover assembly.
3 Close the front door.
4 Enter Diagnostics menu.

Service menus
170
 5027

5 Select MISC TESTS in the Diag Menu, and press Select.

6 Select Motor Detect, and press Select.
If you press Select before closing the front cover, then a message appears: Close Cover. Press
Select.
Motor Detection In Progress… appears.
The motor detection process takes about 10 seconds, and stops automatically.
Detect Complete. Rebooting… appears, and the printer performs a POR (Power On Reset).
If the motor ran, the test was passed. If the motor did not run, the test failed.

PRINT TESTS
The Print Test determines if the printer can print on media from any of the paper input sources. Each of the
installed sources is available within the Print Tests menu.
The content of the test page varies depending on the media installed in the selected input source.
• If a source is selected that contains paper, then a page similar to the Quick Test Page is printed and does
not contain the Print Registration diamonds.
• If a source is selected which contains envelopes, then an Envelope Print Test pattern is printed. This pattern
contains only text, which consists of continuous prints of each character in the selected symbol set.
• If Continuous is selected, then the same page prints continuously from the selected source until you press
Stop (X). If Continuous is selected from a source which contains envelopes, then the envelope print test
pattern is printed on the first envelope, and the rest are blank.
The Print Test page always prints single-sided, regardless of the Duplex setting or the presence of the Duplex
option.
To run the Print Test:
1 From the Diagnostics menu, touch PRINT TESTS.
2 Select the paper source.
3 Select either Single or Continuous.
4 If Single is selected, no buttons are active while the Print Test Page is printing. If Continuous is selected,
Stop (X) can be pressed to cancel the test.
5 At the end of the test, the printer returns to the PRINT TESTS menu.

Print Quality Pages

The print quality test consists of five pages. Pages one and two contain a mixture of graphics and text. The
remainder of the pages only contain graphics.
This test may be printed from either Configuration menu or the Diagnostics menu. To run the print quality pages
from the Diagnostics menu, touch PRINT TESTS > Print Quality Pages. This test cannot be canceled or
terminated after the test has begun. After the test pages print, the printer returns to the PRINT TESTS menu.

Feed Tests
Any installed input tray can be tested. The pages fed through the printer are blank.

Service menus
171
 5027

To run the Feed Test:

1 Select INPUT TRAY TESTS from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Feed Tests, and press Select.
3 Select the tray to be tested. Choices are installed trays, including Tray 1, Tray 2, MP Feeder.
4 Select Single or Continuous, and press Select.
• Single—a single sheet of blank paper is fed, and the test stops.
• Continuous—sheets are fed continuously, until Stop is pressed.

Print quality test pages

The print quality test consists of five pages. Pages one and two contain a mixture of graphics and text. The
remainder of the pages contain only graphics. The test prints on the media in tray 1.
To run the print quality pages from the Diagnostics Menu:
1 Select PRINT TESTS, and press Select.
2 Select Prt Qual Pgs, and press Select.
The message Printing Quality Test Pages is displayed.
Note: Once the test is started, it cannot be canceled.
When the test pages print, the printer returns to the original screen.

HARDWARE TESTS
If the hardware test fails, replace the failing part.

Panel Test
This test verifies the operator panel display function.
To run the Panel Test:
1 From the Diagnostics menu, navigate to HARDWARE TESTS > LCD Test.
The Panel test continually executes.
2 Press Stop (X) to cancel the test.

Button Test
This test verifies the operator panel button function.
To run the Button Test:
1 From the Diagnostics menu, navigate to:
HARDWARE TESTS > Button Test
2 With no buttons pressed, a pattern matching the operator panel buttons is displayed. Press each operator
panel button one at a time, and an “X” displays in the box that represents the button.
3 Press Stop (X) or touch Back to exit the test.

Service menus
172
 5027

DRAM Test
This test checks the validity of DRAM, both standard and optional. The test repeatedly writes patterns of data
to DRAM to verify that each bit in memory can be set and read correctly.
To run the DRAM Test:
From the Diagnostics menu, navigate to HARDWARE TESTS > DRAM Test.
DRAM Test Testing… appears on the screen, followed by Resetting the Printer.
After the printer resets, the results of the test appear: DRAM Test (x)MB P:###### F:######.
• (x) represents the size of the installed DRAM.
• P:###### represents the number of times the memory test has passed and finished successfully, with the
maximum pass count being 999,999.
• F:##### represents the number of times the memory test has failed and finished with errors, with the
maximum fail count being 999,999.
After the maximum pass count or fail count is reached, or when all the DRAM has been tested, the test stops
and the final results appear.

USB HS Test Mode

1 From the Diagnostics menu, navigate to:
Hardware Tests > USB HS Test Mode
2 Choose the desired port, and then choose the desired test.
Ports Tests
Port 0 Test J
Port 1 Test K
Port 2 Test SEO NAK
Port 3 Test Packet
Test Force Enable
Single Step Get Device
Single Step Set
Feature

3 To exit the test, POR the printer.

4 If the test fails, replace the failing USB cable.

DUPLEX TESTS

Duplex Quick Test

The duplex quick test determines if the Duplex Option Top Margin is set correctly. This test prints a duplexed
version of the Quick Test Page that can be used to adjust the Top Margin for the back of the duplexed page.
You can run one duplexed page (Single) or continue printing duplexed pages (Continuous) until Stop (X) is
pressed.

Service menus
173
 5027

You must use either Letter or A4 paper.

To run the duplex quick test:

1 From the Diagnostics menu, touch DUPLEX TESTS > Duplex Quick Test.
2 Select Single or Continuous. The single test cannot be canceled.
The printer attempts to print the Quick Test Page from the default paper source. If the default paper source
supports only envelopes, then the page is printed from Tray 1.
3 Check the Quick Test Page for the correct offset between the placement of the first scan line on the front
and back side of a duplexed sheet.
4 If adjustment is necessary, the Top Margin in the Registration menu must be adjusted first. The Duplex Top
Margin Offset may be adjusted next. A positive offset moves the text down the page and widens the top
margin, while a negative offset moves the text up the page and narrows the top margin.
5 Press Stop (X) to cancel the test.

Service menus
174
 5027

Duplex Top Margin

This setting controls the offset between the first scan line on the front of the duplex page and the first scan line
on the back of the page. Therefore, be sure to set the top margin in REGISTRATION before setting the duplex
top margin. See “REGISTRATION” on page 167.
To set the Duplex Top Margin
1 Select DUPLEX TESTS from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Quick Test, and press Select.
3 Select Single, and press Select.
4 Hold the page to the light to see whether the top margin of the back aligns with the top margin of the front.
5 Select Top Margin from DUPLEX TESTS.
6 Use Left or Right to select the margin setting you need to change.
• Each increment shifts the duplex top margin by 1/100 of an inch.
• The Top Margin (duplex) range is -50 to +50, and the default value is 0.
• An increase in the value moves the backside top margin down and widens the top margin. A decrease
moves the top margin upward and narrows the top margin.
7 Press Select to save the new value.
8 Print the Quick Test (duplex) again (steps 1–4) to verify the adjustment. Repeat if necessary.

Duplex Left Margin

This setting shifts the image on the back of the duplex sheet to the left or right to correctly position it on the
page. Therefore, be sure to set the top margin in REGISTRATION before setting the duplex top margin. See
“REGISTRATION” on page 167.
To set the Duplex Left Margin
1 Select DUPLEX TESTS from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Quick Test, and press Select.
3 Select Single, and press Select.
4 Hold the page to the light to see whether the top margin of the back aligns with the top margin of the front.
5 Select Left Margin from DUPLEX TESTS.
6 Use Left or Right to select the margin setting you need to change.
• Each increment shifts the duplex left margin by 4 pixels at 500 dpi (0.0067 inches or 0.1693 mm).
• The Left Margin (duplex) range is -25 to +25, and the default value is 0.
• An increase in the value moves the backside left margin to the right, and widens the left margin. A
decrease moves the backside left margin to the left, and narrows the left margin.
7 Press Select to save the new value.
8 Print the Quick Test (duplex) again (steps 1–4) to verify the adjustment. Repeat if necessary.

Service menus
175
 5027

INPUT TRAY TESTS

Feed Tests
Any installed input tray can be tested. The pages fed through the printer are blank.
To run the Feed Test:
1 Select INPUT TRAY TESTS from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Feed Tests, and press Select.
3 Select the tray to be tested. Choices are installed trays, including Tray 1, Tray 2, MP Feeder.
4 Select Single or Continuous, and press Select.
• Single—a single sheet of blank paper is fed, and the test stops.
• Continuous—sheets are fed continuously, until Stop is pressed.

Sensor Test
Note: This test is not available on all models.
This test is used to verify that the sensors are working correctly for an individual input tray.
1 Select INPUT TRAY TESTS from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Sensor Test, and press Select.
3 Select the tray where you want to test the sensors. .
4 Depending on the tray selected, you may have Empty Sensor, Low Sensor, or Passthru Sensor.
Sensors will be displayed with either Open or Closed. Toggle the sensor you want to test and note the
change of state of that sensor.
Input Tray Empty Sensor Low Sensor Passthru Sensor
Tray 2 (650-sheet duo tray) Open Open Open
Tray 3 (550-sheet tray, C546tdn) Open Open Open

5 To Exit the test, press Back or Stop.

BASE SENSOR TEST

These tests allow you to verify the correct functioning of the front door, input, and output sensors.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use your hand to toggle these switches. Use a nonconducting
item.
To run the Base Sensor Test.
1 Select Base Sensor Test from Diag Menu, and press Select
2 Select the sensor you want to test, and press Select
The following tests are available:

Service menus
176
 5027

Sensor Value How to test

Front Door Opened/Closed Open and close the front door. The sensor should change
state.
Input - S1 Media clear… or Activate the sensor by removing and reinserting the paper
Media present… tray. The sensor should change state.

Input - S2 Media clear… or Remove the media tray. Activate the input (S2) sensor flag.
Media present… The sensor should change state.

Fuser exit sensor Media clear… or Open the front cover. Activate the fuser exit flag. The
Media present… sensor should change state.

Standard Bin Bin full or Bin empty Lift up on the bin-full/narrow media flag, and then release.
The sensor should change state.
C-TMC Not Closed/Closed Remove the cyan toner cartridge while noticing the
operator panel for a change in state. If none is noticed,
pass a flat reflective object or bright light in front of the
TMC sensor. The sensor should momentarily change
state.
M-TMC Not Closed/Closed Remove the magenta toner cartridge while noticing the
operator panel for a change in state. If none is noticed,
pass a flat reflective object or bright light in front of the
TMC sensor. The sensor should momentarily change
state.
Y-TMC Not Closed/Closed Remove the yellow toner cartridge while noticing the
operator panel for a change in state. If none is noticed,
pass a flat reflective object or bright light in front of the
TMC sensor. The sensor should momentarily change
state.
K-TMC Not Closed/Closed Remove the black toner cartridge while noticing the
operator panel for a change in state. If none is noticed,
pass a flat reflective object or bright light in front of the
TMC sensor. The sensor should momentarily change
state.

3 To exit the test, press Back or Stop.

DEVICE TESTS

Quick Disk Test

This test will perform a non-destructive read/write on one block per track on the disk. Once executed, this test
cannot be canceled.
Note: This test only appears when a non-defective disk is installed.

Disk Test/Clean
This test will perform a low-level format of the hard disk which will destroy all data on the disk and which should
never be performed on a good disk. This test should only be used when the disk contains bad data.

Service menus
177
 5027

Note: This test only appears when a non-defective disk is installed.

Note: This process does not erase any information stored on the device’s NAND.
Note: When this test is completed, the disk automatically is initialized with a new file system.

Flash test
This menu item appears only if the flash card is installed. Data is written to the flash card and read back to check
the accuracy.
Warning—Potential Damage: This test deletes all data stored on the flash device. After the test is over,
reformat the flash using Format Flash in the customer Utilities Menu.
To run the Flash Test:
1 Select DEVICE TESTS from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Flash Test, and press Select.
Contents will be lost. Continue? appears.
3 To continue, select Yes, and press Select. To end the test, select No, and press Select.
If you continue, Flash Test Testing… appears.
• If the test is successful, then Flash Test Test Passed appears. Use Format Flash in the Utilities
Menu to reformat the flash card
• If the test is unsuccessful, then Flash Test Test Failed appears. Replace the flash card.
4 Press Back to remove the message and return to the Device Tests menu.

PRINTER SETUP

Defaults
This setting is used by the printer to determine whether US or non-US factory default values should be used.
The following printer settings have different US and non-US values:
Printer default values US value Non-US value
Paper Sizes setting in the General Settings menu U.S. Metric
Default Paper Size (paper feeding sources which do Letter A4
not have hardware size sensing capabilities)
Default Envelope Size (envelope feeding sources 10 Envelope DL Envelope
which do not have hardware size sensing capability)
Fax media size Letter A4
PCL Symbol Set PC-8 PC-850
PPDS Code Page 437 850
Universal Units of Measure Inches Millimeters

Warning—Potential Damage: Modification of the printer setting Defaults causes the NVRAM space to be
restored to the printer’s factory settings.

Service menus
178
 5027

PAGE COUNTS
This menu lets you view the total page counts of the printer or the page counts broken down into color and
mono pages printed. Unlike in previous printers, none of these values can be changed.
Touch Back to return to the Diagnostics menu.

Serial Number
This menu lets you view the total page counts of the printer or the page counts broken down into color and
mono pages printed. Unlike in previous printers, none of these values can be changed.
To view the serial number:
1 Select Printer Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select .
2 Select Serial number, and press Select.
The Serial Number is displayed.
3 Press Back to return to Printer Setup.

Engine Setting 1 through 4

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not change these settings unless requested to do so by your next level of
support.

Model Name
The model name can only be viewed and cannot be changed.

Configuration ID
The two configuration IDs are used to communicate information about certain areas of the printer that cannot
be determined using hardware sensors. The configuration IDs are originally set at the factory when the printer
is manufactured. However, the servicer may need to reset Configuration ID 1 or Configuration ID 2 whenever
the system board is replaced. The IDs consist of eight digits. The first seven digits in each ID are hexadecimal
numbers, while the last digit is a checksum of the preceding seven digits. Each ID can contain a combination
of the digits 0 through 9, and A through F.
Note: When the printer detects a Configuration ID that is not defined or invalid, the following occurs:
• The default standard model Configuration ID is used instead.
• Configuration ID is the only function available in the Diagnostics Menu.
• Unless the menu is in the Diagnostics Menu, Check Config ID displays.
To set the configuration ID:
1 Select Printer Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select .
2 Select Configuration ID, and press Select .
The current value for Configuration ID 1 is displayed.

Service menus
179
 5027

3 Enter the Configuration ID 1.

• Change the left character or digit first.
• To change the value of a character or digit, press Left to decrease or Right to increase the underlined
value, and press Select to move to the next character or digit.
• To move to the next character or digit without changing the current value, press Select.
• When you press Select on the last digit, the value will be submitted.
If Invalid ID appears, then the entry is discarded, and the previous Configuration ID 1 is displayed
on the screen.
If the process is successful, then Submitting Selection appears on the display, followed by the
current value for Configuration ID 2.
4 Repeat the steps for entering the Configuration ID 2, and press Select.
If the Configuration ID 2 is validated, Submitting Selection appears, and a check mark appears next
to Printer Setup.
5 Restart the printer. A POR is not automatically performed.

ITU Barcode
The 16-digit numeric value matches the image transfer unit installed in the printer. If you replace the image
transfer unit, reenter this value. Stop exits the menu.
To enter the ITU barcode:
1 Select Printer Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select .
2 Select ITU Barcode, and press Select.
3 To enter the 16-digit numeric value:
• Use Left to decrease the left most digit value or Right to increase the value.
• Press Select to advance to the next digit.
• If a digit is already correct, then press Select to accept the number and to continue.
• When the last number is entered and you press Select, Submitting changes…should appear.
• If the entered number is incorrect, then Check Sum Does Not Match displays. Check and reenter
the number.

Processor ID
This is a 16‑digit hexadecimal value representing the ID of the processor on the controller card.

Reset Fuser Count

Resets the fuser count value to zero. The Event Log records each time that a user executes the Reset Fuser
Count operation. See “EVENT LOG” on page 183 for more information. This setting appears only if the
Maintenance Warning and Intervention function is enabled in the printer Configuration ID.
To reset the fuser count:
1 Select Printer Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Reset Fuser Cnt, and press Select.

Service menus
180
 5027

3 Select Reset, and press Select.

Reset Resetting… appears.
4 To cancel a reset, press Back.

EP SETUP

EP Defaults
This setting is used to restore each printer setting listed in EP Setup to its factory default value. Sometimes this
is used to help correct print quality problems.
To restore EP Defaults:
1 Select EP Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select EP Defaults, and press Select.
3 Select Restore to reset the values to the factory settings, and select Do Not Restore.
4 To cancel a reset, press Back.

Fuser temperature
This adjustment can be used to help solve some customer problems with paper curl on low-grade papers and
problems with letterheads on some types of media.
To adjust the fuser temperature:
1 Select EP Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Fuser Temp, and press Select.
3 Select Normal, High, or Low. The default is Normal.
4 To return to the menus, press Back.

DC Charge Adjust, Bias Adjust, Transfer Adjust

Each of these three settings enables you to adjust the high voltage levels controlling the electrophotographic
process. You will use these settings to compensate for unusual operating circumstances such as high humidity.
The printer uses the value of these settings together with other settings to calculate printing speed and media
selection.

TPS Setup: Right or Left

The value of the toner density sensor (also called toner patch sensor or TPS) is set at manufacturing. If a sensor
is replaced, enter the 32-digit hexadecimal toner density value (TPS) value from the bar code next to the sensor.
To enter the value:
1 Select TPS Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select .
2 Select Right or Left, and press Select.
TPS Right 1-16 or TPS Left 1-16 appears above a blinking 0 in the left position.

Service menus
181
 5027

3 To enter a character or digit:

a Press Left to decrease or Right to increase the blinking value.
b Pause for several seconds without pressing any buttons. The blinking value becomes solid.
If the value is incorrect, then use Back to go back and reenter the number.
c Continue until the last value is reached.
d When the last of the 16 values is entered and becomes solid, TPS Right 17-32 or TPS Left
17-32 appears.
e Continue entering and pausing
4 After the 32nd number is entered and becomes solid, the number is automatically entered.
• If the number is incorrect, then Checksum does not match appears, and the original screen appears
to reenter the value.
If the number is correct, then Saving changes to NVRAM appears.

TPS Setup: Reset Color Cal

This setting allows the device to adjust the alignment of the color planes using pre-programmed default values.
To reset the programmed value:
1 Select TPS Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Reset Color Cal, and press Select.
Resetting appears. When the reset is complete, the screen is automatically returned to TPS Setup.

TPS Setup: Cal Ref Adj

The Cal Ref Adj is used with Reset Color Cal, which resets to a default value, Cal Ref Adj allows you to fine tune
the TPS function.
To set the Cal Ref Adj:
1 Select TPS Setup from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Cal Ref Adj, and press Select.
3 Select CMY or Black, and press Select.
4 Press Left to decrease or Right to increase the value.
The values can be -8 to +8, and the default value is 0.
5 To cancel and return to the menus, press Back.

REPORTS

Menu Settings Page

To print the Menu Settings Page:
1 Select Reports from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Menu Settings Page, and press Select.

Service menus
182
 5027

Installed Licenses
This setting lists all the installed licenses and their feature data.
Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Reports > Installed Licenses

EVENT LOG

Display Log
The event log provides a history of printer errors. It contains the most recent errors that have occurred on the
printer. The most recent error displays in position 1. If an error occurs after the log is full, the oldest error is
discarded. Identical errors in consecutive positions in the log are entered, so there may be repetitions. All 2xx
and 9xx error messages are stored in the Event Log.
To view the event log:
1 Select Event Log from Diag Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Display Log, and press Select.
Error codes display on the screen. Press Left or Right to view additional error codes. Press Right to view
additional details.
3 Press Back to return to the Event Log menu.

Print Log
Additional diagnostic information is available when you print the event log from the Diagnostics Menu rather
than the Configuration Menu.
The Event Log printed from Diag Menu includes:
• Detailed printer information, including code versions
• Time and date stamps
• Page counts for most errors

Service menus
183
 5027

• Additional debug information in some cases

The printed event log can be faxed to your next level of support for verification or diagnosis.
To print the event log:
1 Select Event Log from Diag Menu, and press Select .
2 Select Print Log, and press Select.
3 Press Back to return to Event Log.

Clear Log
Use Clear Log to remove the current information in the Event Log. This affects both the viewed log and the
printed log information.
To clear the event log:
1 Select Event Log from Diag Menu, and press Select .
2 Select Clear Log, and press Select.
3 Select YES to clear the Event Log or NO to exit the Clear Log menu. If YES is selected, the Deleting
EVENT LOG displays on the screen.
4 Press Back to return to Event Log.

Exit Diagnostics
Press Select to exit Diag Menu. The printer performs a power-on reset and returns to normal mode.

Service menus
184
 5027

Configuration menu

Entering configuration mode

The Configuration Menu group contains a set of menus, settings, and operations which are infrequently required
by a user. Generally, the options made available in this menu group are used to configure a printer for operation.
For CS310 models:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Press and hold the OK and Right buttons.
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Release the buttons after 10 seconds.
For CS410 and CS510 models:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Press and hold the 2 and 6 buttons.
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Release the buttons after 10 seconds.

Print Quality Pages

The Print Quality Pages can be printed from both the Configuration Menu and the Diagnostics Menu. The
Configuration Menu is limited in information compared to the pages printed from the Diagnostics Menu.
To help isolate print quality problems, print the Print Quality Test Pages. The pages are formatted. The
Printing Quality Test Pages message appears, and then the pages print. The message remains on
the operator panel until all the pages print.
Press Select to print the pages. The Print Quality Test Pages contain several pages. The first page, which is
printed in English text only, contains a mixture of text and graphics. The information includes values of the
Quality Menu settings in Settings and printer and toner cartridge configuration information. The remaining
pages contain only graphics.

Fuser Cleaning Process

Over the lifetime of the device, flecks that adhere to the fuser may transfer to printed pages. The three step
fuser cleaning process removes these flecks.
Values Description
Print Cleaning The printer prints three very high-coverage, one-sided pages. Each of these pages contain
Pages instructions and information that the process heats the fuser to a very high temperature in order
to loosen the flecks and make them sticky.
Start Cleaning Several high-coverage sheets are fed through the fuser in order to pick up and remove the
Process flecks.

Service menus
185
 5027

Reports
The Reports setting contains the Menu Settings Page and Event Log.
Menu Settings Page
Print the menu settings pages to list the customer settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.
If is helpful to print the customer settings before you restore the factory defaults or make major changes.
To print the menu settings:
1 Select Reports from the Config Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Menu Settings Page, and press Select.
Event Log
The Event Log lets the system support person print a limited set of the information contained in the Diagnostic
Menu version of the printed Event Log. The limited Configuration log and the full Diagnostics log printed versions
show the same operator panel messages when the print and follow the same layout guidelines.
To print the Event Log:
1 Select Reports from the Config Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Print Log, and press Select to begin printing the log.

Color Trapping
Color Trapping uses an algorithm to compensate for mechanical incorrect registration in the printer. When small
black text or fine black lines are being printed, the printer checks to see if they are being printed on top of a
colored background. If so, then rather than remove the color from beneath the black content, the printer leaves
the color around the edge of the test or line. The hole in the colored region is reduced in size, which prevents
the characteristic white gap that is caused by incorrect registration.
Values include Off and number 1‑5 (the default is 2). Values 1 through 5 indicate the amount of color remaining
beneath the black content. Each setting increments by 1/600 of an inch. The more inaccurate the registration
setting, the higher the setting needs to be adjusted. Selecting Off disables color trapping.

Tray Insert Msg

This setting determines how many seconds the panel will display the Tray Insert message after a user has
inserted a tray into the printer.
The user can choose to disable this setting, or to set the value between 1 to 90 seconds. The default value is
5 seconds.

Panel Menus
The Panel Menus lets the system support person enable or disable the control panel menus. Selecting On (the
default) allows users to chance values for the printer. Off disables the users’ access to menus. If a user presses
Menu, then they receive a message that the panel menus are locked. When set to Off, this setting restricts all
menu access, even to menus or items set for PIN access, However, when set to On, all PIN restrictions are
restored.
This menu item appears only when the PJL PASSWORD Environment variable is set to 0.

Service menus
186
 5027

PPDS Emulation
PPDS Emulation activates or deactivates (default) the Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) emulation language.
This menu item appears only if the PPDS interpreter is available.

Download emuls
This appears only if at least one download emulator (DLE) is installed. The default setting is Disable. All download
emulators (DLEs) are re‑enabled automatically after two PORs.

Safe Mode
The settings for this menu item are On and Off (default). When enabled, Safe Mode lets the printer operate in
a special limited mode in which it attempts to continue offering as much functionality as possible despite known
issues. For more information about Safe Mode and the Safe Mode print behavior for this model, see “Using
Safe Mode” on page 34.
To change the setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Safe Mode.
2 Select On or Off to change the setting.
3 Select Submit.
4 POR the printer.

Demo Mode
The Demo Mode lets marketing personnel or merchandisers demonstrate the printer to potential customers
by printing the demo page.
Selections include Deactivate (default) and Activate. Select Deactivate to turn Demo Mode off; or select
Activate to turn Demo Mode on.

Energy Conserve
Energy Conserve affects the values that appear in the Power Saver menu in the customer Setup Menu. This
menu item appears only when the printer model does not support Automatic Power Saver or has deactivated
Automatic Power Saver. Energy Conserve affects only the values that are displayed in the Power Saver menu.
Select Off in Energy Conserve to allow Power Saver in the customer menu to display Disable as an option. If
Disable is selected in the customer Power Saver, the printer deactivates the Power Saver feature. Select On
(the default) in Energy Conserve to prevent Disable from appearing as an option in the Power Saver setting,
and preventing the customer from turning off Power Saver.

Auto Color Adjustment

Auto Color Adjustment sets the suggested number of pages which the printer should print between consecutive
calibrations.
Selections are Off and the values between 100 and 1000 in increments of 50. The default is 700 pages.

Service menus
187
 5027

If the printer exceeds the set value while printing a job, it completes the current job and any other jobs received
while printing the current job before it initiates a calibration. The printer does not cancel or suspend an active
job to perform a calibration. If a user is using the menus, including the Configuration Menu and the Diagnostics
Menu, an automatic color adjust calibration does not occur.
When an event other than page count triggers this calibration, the count that monitors the maximum number
of pages printed will be reset. For example, if the user replaces an empty toner cartridge, the next time the
printer is started, it will sense the new cartridge and perform the automatic color adjustment, even though the
page counter for Auto Color Adj is fewer than required. The Auto Color Adj page counter is then reset.

Auto Align Adj

Note: This setting should never be set to off during normal printer usage.
Toner Patch Sensing (TPS) is a diagnostic mechanism that automatically adjusts the printer’s toner density. When
TPS executes, the printer generates toner patches on the belt and then uses these to calculate the appropriate
amount of necessary adjustment. When an event initiates a TPS operation, the device performs a toner density
calibration.
Regardless of this setting’s value, the device always performs an automatic alignment calibration after any
initiating event occurs. If this setting’s value is set to off, then the device does not use the results of this test to
automatically adjust its alignment, and may eventually require the user to have to manually align the device.

Color Alignment
A user will need to run the color alignment process after any event that might cause the printhead to misalign.
When this setting is selected, the device generates several alignment pages. The user can then manually adjust
the value of any of the settings A through L as necessary in order to improve the device’s alignment. Regardless
of this setting’s value, the device always performs an automatic alignment calibration after any initiating event
occurs. If this setting’s value is set to off, the device does not use the results of this test to automatically adjust
its alignment, and may eventually require the user to have to manually align the device.
Note: The user will not be allowed to access the Cancel Job or Reset Printer functions while printing the
color alignment pages.

Paper Prompts
This controls which tray a change prompt is directed to when paper is sensed to be the wrong size.
Note: The value of “Action for prompts” on page 189 may override the value of this setting.
To change this setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Paper Prompts.
2 Select from the available options:
• Auto (default)
• Multi‑purpose Feeder
• Manual Paper

3 Depending on the printer model, press OK or touch to save the setting, or press X to return to the
Configuration menu without saving any changes.

Service menus
188
 5027

When it is set to Auto, the emulator selected to print the job determines which of the installed input sources
will receive the change prompt. When set to a value other than Auto, the selected source always receives this
type of prompt.

Envelope Prompts
This controls which tray a change prompt is directed to when the envelopes are sensed to be the wrong size.
Note: The value of “Action for prompts” on page 189 may override the value of this setting.
To change this setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Envelope Prompts.
2 Select from the available options:
• Auto (default)
• Multi‑purpose Feeder
• Manual Envelope

3 Depending on the printer model, press OK or touch to save the setting, or press X to return to the
Configuration menu without saving any changes.
When it is set to Auto, the emulator selected to print the job determines which of the installed input sources
will receive the change prompt. When set to a value other than Auto, the selected source always receives this
type of prompt.

Action for prompts

This setting enables users to determine which input source would receive paper-related or envelope-related
change prompts when they occur. Regardless of the target source, the device always requires some type of
user assistance to resolve the change prompt (examples: pushing a button to ignore the prompt and changing
the source’s installed media). However, this setting gives a user the option of having the device resolve change
prompt situations without requiring any user assistance.
To change this setting:
1 From the Configuration Menu, navigate to Action for prompts.
2 Touch Left or Right to change the setting.
3 Touch Submit to save the setting, or touch Back to return to the Configuration Menu without saving any
changes.
When set to Prompt user, the device behaves like the past implementation. When a change prompt occurs,
the device stops printing, posts the change prompt to the target source, and waits for the user to select an
action before continuing.
When set to Continue, the device automatically assumes that the user selects Continue every time a change
prompt is encountered. Likewise, when the device is set to Use Current, all change prompts will perform as if
Use Current was selected by the user.

Service menus
189
 5027

Jobs on Disk
This setting appears only if a hard disk is installed. It allows buffered jobs to be deleted from the disk. This does
not affect Print and Hold or parked jobs.
To change the setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Jobs on Disk.
2 Select from the available options to change the setting:
• Delete
• Do Not Delete (default)
3 Press X to return to the Configuration menu.

Disk Encryption
Warning—Potential Damage: If the settings are changed, then the printer completely formats the hard disk.
All information on the disk will be unrecoverable.
This setting appears only if a hard disk is installed. It controls whether the printer encrypts the information that
it writes to the hard disk.
To change the setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Disk Encryption.
2 Select from the available options to change the setting.
• Enable—enables encryption of hard disk.
• Disable (default)—enables formatting of hard disk.
3 Contents will be lost. Continue? appears. Select Yes to proceed with the encryption or
formatting of the disk, or No to cancel the operation. If Yes is selected, then a progress bar appears on the
display that indicates the overall completion of the selected operation. After completion, the display returns
to Disk Encryption.

Font Sharpening
Font Sharpening allows a user to set a text point-size value below the setting of the high-frequency screens
used when printing font data. This menu item affects only the PostScript, PCL 5, PCL XL, and PDF emulators.
Settings are in the range of 0–150 (24 is the default). For example, if the value is set to 24, then all fonts sized
24 points or less use the high-frequency screens. To increase the value by 1, press the right arrow; to decrease
the value by 1, press the left arrow.

Require Standby
This turns On or Off the standby mode in the General Settings Menu. The default setting is On.

Service menus
190
 5027

UI Automation
Once enabled, this setting creates an ENABLE_UI_AUTOMATION file in the /var/fs/shared/ directory. As long
as this file exists, the printer permits external developers to test the stability of their applications against the
printer to make sure that their applications have an appropriate level of stability. Disabling this setting deletes
the file and prohibits automated testing.
To change the setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to UI Automation.
2 Select from the available options to change the setting.
• Enable
• Disable (default)

3 Depending on the printer model, press OK or touch to save the setting, or press X to return to the
Configuration menu without saving any changes.

LES Applications
This enables or disables the Lexmark Embedded Solutions (LES) applications. The default setting is Enable.

Key Repeat Initial Delay

Note: This setting is available only on the MS610de model.
This setting determines the length of delay before a repeating key starts repeating. The range is 0.25–5
seconds, with increments of 0.25. The default setting is one second.
To adjust this setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Key Repeat Initial Delay.
2 Touch the arrow keys to adjust the setting.

3 Touch to save the setting, or press X to return to the Configuration menu without saving any changes.

Key Repeat Rate

Note: This setting is available only on the MS610de model.
This setting indicates the number of presses per second for repeating keys. The range is 0.5–100, with
increments of 0.5. The default setting is 15 presses per second.
To adjust this setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Key Repeat Rate.
2 Touch the arrow keys to adjust the setting.

3 Touch to save the setting, or press X to return to the Configuration menu without saving any changes.

Service menus
191
 5027

Clear Supply Usage History

This setting reverts the supply usage history (number of pages and days remaining) to the factory shipped level.
To clear the supply usage history:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Clear Supply Usage History.
2 Depending on the printer model, press OK or touch Clear Supply Usage History to proceed.

Clear Custom Status

Executing this operation erases any strings that have been defined by the user for the default or alternate
custom messages.
To clear the custom status:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Clear Custom Status.
2 Depending on the printer model, press OK or touch Clear Custom Status to proceed.

USB Speed
This setting is used to set the throughput of the USB port on the printer.
Available options:
• Auto
• Full—Forces the USB port to run at full speed and also disables its high‑speed capabilities.

Automatically Display Error Screens

If On, the panel automatically displays any existing printer-related IR after the printer remains inactive on the
home screen for a length of time equal to the Screen timeout setting in the Timeouts section of the General
settings menu. Any IR that appears on the display will give the user the option of returning to the home screen
without clearing it. From the home screen, any other workflow or feature can be initiated as usual. Once the
printer returns to the home screen, any existing IR will again appear after the printer remains inactive for a
length of time equal to the Screen timeout setting.
To change this setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Automatically Display Error Screens.
2 Select from the available options:
• On (default)
• Off

3 Depending on the printer model, press OK or touch to save the setting, or press X to return to the
Configuration menu without saving any changes.

USB PnP
In some cases, the USB port at the back of the printer may be incompatible with the chipset in a user’s PC. This
setting lets the user change the USB driver mode to improve its compatibility with these PCs.

Service menus
192
 5027

Available options:
• 1
• 2

Restore Factory Defaults

Restore Settings
This setting enables a user to restore all of the printer settings to either the network settings (on network models
only) or to the base printer settings.
To restore the settings:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to Restore Factory Defaults > Restore Settings.
2 Select from the available options:
• Restore Printer Settings—restores all non‑critical base printer NVRAM settings.
• Restore Network Settings—restores all network NVRAM settings.
• Restore Apps—restores the factory default eSF configuration.

Erase Printer Memory

This makes any sensitive information that may exist on the volatile or non-volatile storage of the device
completely indecipherable. When selected, the printer performs a non‑critical NVRAM reset and then reboots.

Erase Hard Disk

This setting performs a wipe of the printer hard disk, erasing all data.
Warning—Potential Damage: This deletes all data on the printer hard disk, including downloaded fonts,
macros, and held jobs. Do not initiate a disk wipe if you have information on the printer that you want to
save.
Available options:
• Single Pass Erase—overwrites all data and the file system. This wipe is faster but less secure since it is
possible to retrieve the deleted data with forensic data‑retrieval techniques.
• Multi Pass Erase—overwrites all data without rewriting the file system. This wipe is DoD 5220.22-M compliant
since the deleted data is irretrievable.
Note: If the printer is reset while a disk wipe operation is executing, then Corrupt Disk appears upon
regaining power.

ADF Edge Erase

The value of this setting determines the size in millimeters of the “no-print” zone around an ADF scan job.
To change this setting:
1 From the Configuration Menu, navigate to ADF Edge Erase.
2 Touch Left or Right to change the setting.

Service menus
193
 5027

3 Touch Submit to save the setting, or touch Back to return to the Configuration Menu without saving any
changes.

Size sensing

B5/Executive
Due to engine limitations, Trays 1 through 4 cannot simultaneously sense executive and JIS-B5-size paper. The
value of this setting determines which of the two paper sizes these trays will sense automatically. This setting
will apply to all automatic trays, but not to the MP Feeder. The MP Feeder can support these paper sizes
regardless of the value of this setting.

Tray [x] sensing

By turning the tray [x] sensing setting to Auto, every input option equipped with size sensing hardware
automatically registers what size of paper it contains. When this setting is turned Off, the printer ignores the
size detected by the hardware and treats the input source as a non-sensing source. The media size can be set
by the operator panel or the data stream.
To change this setting:
1 From the Configuration menu, navigate to SIZE SENSING. The screen displays each size sensing equipped
input source and its current Size Sensing setting.
2 Select the appropriate input source.
3 Touch Left or Right to change the setting.
4 Touch Submit to save the setting, or touch Back to return to the Configuration menu without saving any
changes.

Factory Defaults
Warning—Potential Damage: This operation cannot be undone.
This setting enables a user to restore all of the device settings to either the network settings (on network models
only) or to the base device settings.
To print current menu settings:
Note: It is recommended that you first print the customer’s current settings by printing a copy of the Menu
Settings pages. Customer settings are available from the Ready prompt Diagnostics Menu settings are
available in the Diagnostics Menu, and Config Menu settings are available in the Config Menu.
1 Turn the printer off, or select Exit Config Menu.
2 At the Ready prompt, select Menus and press Select.
3 Select Reports, and press Select.
4 Select Menu Settings Page, and press Select.
5 Enter the Diagnostic Menu, select Reports, Menu Settings Page, and press Select.
6 Turn the printer off, or select Exit Diags.
7 Enter Configuration Menu, select Reports, Menu Settings Page, and press Select.

Service menus
194
 5027

To reset factory defaults:

1 Select Reports from the Config Menu, and press Select.
2 Select Factory Defaults, and press Select
3 Select Restore Base (for locally attached printers) or Restore STD NET (if you have integrated network
support).
Submitting Changes… appears on the operator panel, and then the printer PORs (restarts in Ready mode).

Exit Config
Press Select to exit the Configuration Menu. The printer performs a power-on reset and returns to normal mode.

Entering invalid engine mode

This mode is used if the machine has invalid code and needs the correct code loaded. After entering this mode,
the firmware code can be updated.
For CS310
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Press and hold the Return and Left buttons simultaneously.
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Release the buttons after 10 seconds.
For CS410 and CS510
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Press and hold the 3, 4, and 6 buttons simultaneously.
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Release the buttons after 10 seconds.

Entering recovery mode

This mode will allow the printer to boot from a secondary set of instructions to allow a code flash to the printer.
Code can be flashed from a PC via USB.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Press and hold the 7, 2, and 8 buttons simultaneously.
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Release the buttons after 10 seconds.

Service menus
195
 5027

Accessing the Network SE menu

This menu contains settings for fine tuning the communication settings for the network interfaces and protocols.
1 Touch Select and Right.
2 Navigate to Networks/Ports > Standard Network > Std Network Setup.
3 Press and hold 6, 7, and 9 simultaneously.

Accessing the service engineer (SE) menu

From a Web browser on a host PC, add /se to the printer IP address.

Service menus
196
 5027

Repair information
• “Removal precautions” on page 197
• “Removal procedures” on page 219
• “Left side removals” on page 219
• “Right side removals” on page 238
• “Front removals” on page 258
• “Bottom removals” on page 277
• “Rear side removals” on page 298
• “Top side removals” on page 302
• “Options removals” on page 308

Removal precautions
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: For personal safety and to prevent damage to the printer, remove the
power cord from the electrical outlet before you connect or disconnect any cable, electronic board, or
assembly. Disconnect any connections between the printer and the PCs/peripherals.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.

Data security notice

1 This printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings,
information from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory, along with the types of data
stored by each, are described below.
• Volatile memory—This device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer
user data during simple print and copy jobs.
• Non-volatile memory—This device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND
(flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information,
scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
• Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed
for device-specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print-related.
The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk
or network file shares, or transfer FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain
buffered user data from complex print jobs, as well as form data and font data.
To erase volatile memory, turn off the printer.
To erase non-volatile memory, see the menu item under “Configuration menu” on page 185 pertaining to
this.
To erase the printer hard disk, see the menu item under “Configuration menu” on page 185 pertaining to
this.
The following parts are capable of storing memory:
• printer control panel
• UICC (User Interface Controller Card)

Repair information
197
 5027

• controller board
• optional hard drives
Note: The printer control panel and controller board contain NVRAM.
2 After removing the old part, it must be returned to your next level of support.

Handling ESD‑sensitive parts

Many electronic products use parts that are known to be sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent
damage to ESD-sensitive parts, use the following instructions in addition to all the usual precautions, such as
turning off power before removing logic boards:
• Keep the ESD-sensitive part in its original shipping container (a special “ESD bag”) until you are ready to
install the part into the machine.
• Make the least-possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of static electricity from clothing
fibers, carpets, and furniture.
• Put the ESD wrist strap on your wrist. Connect the wrist band to the system ground point. This discharges
any static electricity in your body to the machine.
• Hold the ESD-sensitive part by its edge connector shroud (cover); do not touch its pins. If you are removing
a pluggable module, use the correct tool.
• Do not place the ESD-sensitive part on the machine cover or on a metal table; if you need to put down the
ESD-sensitive part for any reason, first put it into its special bag.
• Machine covers and metal tables are electrical grounds. They increase the risk of damage, because they
make a discharge path from your body through the ESD-sensitive part. (Large metal objects can be discharge
paths without being grounded.)
• Prevent ESD-sensitive parts from being accidentally touched by other personnel. Install machine covers
when you are not working on the machine, and do not put unprotected ESD-sensitive parts on a table.
• If possible, keep all ESD-sensitive parts in a grounded metal cabinet (case).
• Be extra careful while working with ESD-sensitive parts when cold-weather heating is used, because low
humidity increases static electricity.

Controller board/control panel replacement

This procedure should be followed only if both the controller board and the control panel fail. If you need to
replace only one of the FRUs, follow the startup procedure described in the FRU’s removal procedure.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY
The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if
a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery.
Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

Warning—Potential Damage: If the control panel and the controller board are being replaced at the same
time, replace the parts in this order to avoid damage to the machine.
1 Replace the controller board first.
Note: Do not replace the control panel and controller card in the machine at the same time.
2 Turn on the printer and enter Diagnostics mode.

Repair information
198
 5027

3 If the problem is fixed, allow the printer to go through a complete startup cycle and the display to go to
Ready.
Note: Proceed to the next step only if the problem is not fixed.
4 Reinstall the old controller card, and do not POR the printer.
5 Replace the control panel, and then enter Diagnostics mode.
6 If the problem is fixed, allow the printer to go through a complete startup cycle and the display to go to
Ready.
Note: After this procedure is completed successfully, there is no need to adjust any settings. If the above
procedure fails, you must contact the technical support center for further instructions.

Restoring the printer configuration after replacing the controller board

Restore the printer to its correct configuration to complete the replacement service. Use the Service Restore
Tool to download the software bundle, and then flash the printer settings and embedded solutions.
Note: The software bundle contains the latest version of the firmware, applications, and software licenses
from the Lexmark Virtual Solutions Center (VSC). The printer firmware may be at a different level from what
was used before replacing the controller board.

Using the Service Restore Tool

1 Go to https://cdp.lexmark.com/service-restore-tool/ to access the tool.
2 Log in using your Lexmark or partner login.
If your login fails, then contact your next level of support.
3 Enter the printer serial number, and then submit the information.

Note: Make sure that the serial number that appears on the verification screen is correct.

Repair information
199
 5027

4 Save the zip file.

Note: Make sure that the serial number in the zip file matches the serial number of the printer being
restored.

5 Extract the contents of the zip file, open the Readme file, and then follow the instructions in the file.
Notes:
• Perform the install instructions on the Readme file in the exact order shown. Only restart the printer
when instructed to in the file.
• For more information on how to flash the downloaded files, see “Updating the printer firmware ” on
page 203.
• To load the zip files that are extracted from the Service Restore Tool, see “Restoring solutions,
licenses, and configuration settings” on page 202.

Repair information
200
 5027

6 After performing the installation instructions in the Readme file, confirm from the customer if all the eSF
apps have been installed.
Notes:
• If you are unable to access the administrative menus to verify that the printer is restored, then ask the
customer for access rights.
• If a 10.00 error is displayed after you restart the printer, then contact the next level of support.

Repair information
201
 5027

Restoring solutions, licenses, and configuration settings

To load the zip files that are extracted from the Service Restore Tool, do the following:
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
2 Navigate to Settings > Configuration Files.

3 From the Configuration File History tab, navigate to Import > Choose File.
4 Select the zip file from the expanded Service Restore Tool package.

Repair information
202
 5027

5 Click Import.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 for the other zip files that are included in the expanded zip file.

Updating the printer firmware

Warning—Potential Damage: Before updating the printer firmware, ask the next level of support for the
correct code. Using an incorrect code level may damage the printer.
The printer must be in ready state in order to update the firmware.

Using a flash drive

This option is available only in printer models with front USB port.
Make sure to enable the Enable Drive and Update Code settings. You can find the settings in the Flash drive
menu under the Settings menu.
1 Insert the flash drive into the USB port.
2 From the home screen, navigate to USB Menu: Print from USB > Accept or OK.
3 Select the file that you need to flash.
Note: Do not turn off the printer while the update is going on.

Repair information
203
 5027

Using a network computer

Using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Make sure that the printer is in ready state before flashing the printer.
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Obtain the IP address:
• From the home screen
• From the TCP/IP section of the Network/Ports menu
3 From the command prompt of a network computer, open an FTP session to the printer IP address.
4 Use a PUT command to place the firmware file on the printer.
The printer performs a POR sequence and terminates the FTP session.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other files.

Using the Embedded Web Server

Make sure that the printer is in ready state before flashing the printer.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
2 From the home page, navigate to Configuration > Update Firmware.
3 Select the file to use.
The printer performs a POR sequence and terminates the FTP session.
4 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other files.

Backing up eSF solutions and settings

Note: Export the eSF solutions and settings from the printer before replacing the controller board.

Exporting eSF solutions and settings file

1 Reset the printer into Invalid engine mode. See “Entering invalid engine mode” on page 195.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
Note: If the Web page cannot be accessed or an error occurs when starting the printer into Invalid engine
mode, then data backup is not an option. Inform the customer that the data cannot be saved.
3 Navigate to Settings > Solutions > Embedded Solutions.
4 From the Embedded Solutions page, select the applications that you want to export.
5 Click Export.
Note: There is a size limit of 128 KB on the export file.

Repair information
204
 5027

Importing eSF solutions and settings file

After replacing the controller board, import back to the printer the eSF solutions and settings that were exported.
1 Reset the printer into Invalid engine mode. See “Entering invalid engine mode” on page 195.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
Note: If the Web page cannot be accessed or an error occurs when starting the printer into Invalid engine
mode, then data backup is not an option. Inform the customer that the data cannot be saved.
3 Navigate to Settings > Solutions > Embedded Solutions.
4 From the Embedded Solutions page, select the applications that you want to import.
5 Click Import.

Ribbon cable connectors

Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connectors

Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connectors are used on the boards and cards used in this printer. Before inserting or
removing a cable from these connectors, read this entire section. Great care must be taken to avoid damaging
the connector or cable when inserting or removing the cable.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not insert the cable so that the contacts are facing the locking actuator.
The contacts always face away from the actuator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not insert the cable diagonally into the ZIF socket. This can cause damage
to the contacts on the cable.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid using a fingernail, or sharp object to open the locking mechanism. This
could damage the cable.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid pressing against the cable when opening the locking mechanism. This
can also damage the cable.
These are the types of ZIF connectors used in this printer:
• Horizontal top contact connector
• Horizontal bottom contact connector
• Vertical mount contact connector
• Horizontal sliding connector

Repair information
205
 5027

Horizontal top contact connector

This FRU contains a horizontal top contact cable connector. Read the instructions before proceeding.
The horizontal top contact connector uses a back flip locking actuator to lock the ribbon cable into the Zero
Insertion Force (ZIF) connector. The cable is inserted horizontally into the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: When opening or closing this type of actuator, gently lift or close the two tabs
located on each end of the actuator. The two tabs should be moved simultaneously. Do not close the
actuator from the center of the actuator.

Removing a cable from the horizontal top contact connector

1 Place a finger at each end of the locking actuator, and then gently lift the actuator to the unlocked position.

2 Slide the cable out of the connector.

Repair information
206
 5027

Inserting a cable into the horizontal top contact connector

1 When installing the cable, check the locking actuator to ensure it is in the unlocked position. The tabs on
the ends of the actuator are vertical when the actuator is unlocked.

2 Insert the cable with the contacts on the cable facing up. Insert the cable on top of the actuator.
Note: Verify that the cable is installed squarely into the connector. If the cable is not squarely installed,
then intermittent failures could occur.

Repair information
207
 5027

3 Rotate the locking actuator to the locked position. The cable should not move while this step is performed.
If the cable moves, open the actuator, reposition the cable, and then close the actuator to the down position.

Repair information
208
 5027

Horizontal bottom contact connector

This FRU contains a horizontal bottom contact cable connector. Read the instructions before proceeding.
The horizontal bottom contact connector uses a flip locking actuator to lock the ribbon cable into the Zero
Insertion Force (ZIF) connector. The cable is inserted horizontally into the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: When opening or closing this type of actuator, gently lift the center of the
actuator using your finger. Do not use a fingernail or screwdriver to open the actuator. This could damage
the ribbon cable. Do not close the actuator from the ends of the actuator.

Removing a cable from the horizontal bottom contact connector

1 Place two fingers towards each end of the locking actuator, and then gently lift the actuator to the unlocked
position.

2 Slide the cable out of the connector.

Repair information
209
 5027

Inserting a cable into the horizontal bottom contact connector

1 Check the actuator to verify it is in the open position.

2 Insert the cable into the ZIF connector with the contacts facing downward and away from the locking
actuator. The cable needs to be inserted below the actuator.
Note: Verify that the cable is installed squarely into the connector. If the cable is not squarely installed,
then intermittent failures could occur.

Repair information
210
 5027

3 Place your finger in the middle of the actuator, and then rotate the locking actuator to the locked position.

Repair information
211
 5027

Vertical mount contact connector

This FRU contains a vertical mount contact connector. Read the instructions before proceeding.
The vertical mount contact connector uses a back flip locking actuator to lock the ribbon cable into the Zero
Insertion Force (ZIF) connector. The cable is inserted vertically into the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: When opening or closing this type of actuator, gently lift the center of the
actuator using your finger. Do not use a fingernail or screwdriver to open the actuator. This could damage
the ribbon cable. Do not close the actuator from the ends of the actuator.

Removing a cable from the vertical mount contact connector

1 Gently rotate the locking actuator from the center of the actuator to the unlocked position.

2 Slide the cable out of the connector.

Repair information
212
 5027

Inserting a cable into the vertical mount contact connector

1 When installing the cable, check the locking actuator to verify it is in the open position.

2 Insert the cable with the contacts on the cable away from the locking actuator. Insert the cable on top of the
actuator.
Note: Verify that the cable is installed squarely into the connector. If the cable is not squarely installed,
then intermittent failures could occur.

Repair information
213
 5027

3 Rotate the locking actuator to the locked position by pressing down on both ends of the actuator. The cable
should not move when this step is performed. If the cable moves, open the actuator, reposition the cable,
and then close the actuator to the down position.

Repair information
214
 5027

Horizontal sliding contact connector

This FRU contains a horizontal sliding contact connector. Read the instructions before proceeding.
The horizontal sliding contact connector uses a slide locking actuator to lock the ribbon cable into the Zero
Insertion Force (ZIF) connector. The cable is inserted horizontally into the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: When opening or closing this type of actuator, gently push or pull the two tabs
located on each end of the actuator. Do not close the actuator from the center of the actuator. Do not use a
screwdriver to open or close the actuator. Damage to the cable or connector could occur.

Removing a cable from the horizontal sliding contact connector

1 Simultaneously slide the two tabs located on the ends of the locking actuator away from the connector.

2 Slide the cable out of the connector.

Repair information
215
 5027

Inserting a cable into the horizontal sliding contact connector

1 When installing the cable, check the locking actuator to verify it is in the open position. If you are opening
the connector, pull back on both end tabs using equal force to avoid breaking the connector.

2 Insert the cable with the contacts on the cable facing away from the locking actuator. Insert the cable on
top of the actuator.

Repair information
216
 5027

3 Slide the locking actuator towards the connector, locking the cable into place. The cable should not move
when this step is performed. If the cable moves, open the actuator, reposition the cable, and then close the
actuator to the down position.

Repair information
217
 5027

Low Insertion Force (LIF) connector

This FRU contains a Low Insertion Force (LIF) connector. Read the instructions before proceeding.
Warning—Potential Damage: When installing a cable into an LIF connector, care must be taken to avoid
bending the edges of the cables and damaging the contacts on the cables.

Inserting a cable into the LIF connector

1 Looking at the connector, take note on which side the contacts are located. Many boards will have the word
“contacts” stamped on them to indicate which side of the LIF has the contacts. When looking at the board,
take note that the contacts from the board to the connector are located on the side of the connector with
the contacts.

2 Insert the cable squarely into the connector.

Note: Verify that the cable is installed straight into the connector. If the cable is not installed properly,
then intermittent failures could occur.

Repair information
218
 5027

Removal procedures
Keep the following tips in mind as you replace parts:
• Some removal procedures require removing cable ties. You must replace cable ties during reassembly to
avoid pinching wires, obstructing the paper path, or restricting mechanical movement.
• Remove the toner cartridges, imaging unit, and media tray before removing other printer parts. The imaging
unit should be carefully set on a clean, smooth, and flat surface. It should also be protected from light while
out of the device.
• Disconnect all external cables from the printer to prevent possible damage during service.
• Unless otherwise stated, reinstall the parts in reverse order of removal.
• When reinstalling a part held with several screws, start all screws before the final tightening.

Left side removals

Left cover assembly removal

1 Remove the media tray.
2 Position the printer with the left side hanging over the edge of the table.

Repair information
219
 5027

3 Remove the two screws (A) and one screw (B) from the rear, and the one screw (C) from the bottom of the
cover.

4 Flex the cover slightly to unlatch the front bottom corner tab (D), and lower the front while disengaging from
the top cover.

Repair information
220
 5027

Installation note: When replacing the left cover, flex the cover slightly to engage the tab near the power
switch.

Drive unit motor removal

1 Remove the left cover assembly. See “Left cover assembly removal” on page 219.
2 Disconnect the cable (A) from the motor.
3 Remove the four screws (B), and then remove the motor.

EP drive assembly removal

1 Remove the left cover assembly. See “Left cover assembly removal” on page 219.
2 Remove the image transfer unit. See “Image transfer unit (ITU) removal” on page 249.

Repair information
221
 5027

3 Disconnect the three cables (A) from the LVPS.

4 Remove the two top screws (B) holding the top cover to the LVPS shield.

5 Remove the bin-full/narrow media sensor flag. See “Bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag removal” on
page 237.

Repair information
222
 5027

6 Press to unsnap the tabs (C), and gently rotate the exit deflector to remove.

7 Remove the right out put bin deflector. See “Right output bin deflector removal” on page 277.
8 Disconnect the cable (D) from the bin‑full/narrow media sensor, and unroute the cable from its retainer.

Repair information
223
 5027

9 Unhook the springs (E) from both sides of the fuser.

10 Disconnect the thermistor cables (F), and pull them over the retainer.
11 Remove the screw and grounding washer (G) on the right side of the frame.

Note: Be careful to not lose the grounding washer.

12 Rotate the top of the fuser toward the front, and then slide to the left to align the fuser side frames with the
flat area of the shaft.

Repair information
224
 5027

13 Remove the two screws (H).

14 Disconnect the fuser exit cable (I).

15 Lift the front left corner of the top cover, and tilt the LVPS cage (J) to remove. There are two posts at the
bottom of the cage on the left side that need to be disengaged.
Note: Be careful to not damage the fuser exit sensor as it remains in the cage.

Repair information
225
 5027

16 Disconnect the cables from the motors (K) and the two cables from the retainer (L).
17 Remove the two screws (M) from the rear, and unroute all of the cables.

Repair information
226
 5027

18 Remove the two screws (N) from below the EP drive assembly, and the two screws (O) from the right of the
EP drive assembly.

19 Lift the EP drive assembly, and remove.

Developer drive coupling removal

1 Locate the slit (A) on the coupling.
2 Use a spring hook to press the coupling (B) and hold the plastic retainer (C) in place.

C A B

Repair information
227
 5027

3 Use your fingernail to lift the retainer off the stud, and then remove the washer.
Note: Do not reuse the washer from the old coupling when installing the new coupling.
4 Remove the old coupling.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a spring (D) behind the coupling which may come off the
gear when the damaged coupling is removed. Make sure not to lose the spring.

Repair information
228
 5027

Installation notes:
a Use needle-nose pliers to pick up the metal retainer.

Repair information
229
 5027

b In a rotating motion, work the metal retainer into the shaft until it slides in place.

Repair information
230
 5027

c Verify that the new coupling moves freely on the stud.

Repair information
231
 5027

Low‑voltage power supply (LVPS) assembly removal

1 Remove the left cover assembly. See “Left cover assembly removal” on page 219.
2 Press in on the latches to disconnect the three cables (A) from the LVPS.

3 Remove the six screws (B).

4 Remove the LVPS.

Warning—Potential Damage: If you receive a new low-voltage power supply with a voltage selector switch
(C), then be sure to set the switch to the correct setting for your voltage requirements before installing the
low-voltage power supply. The switch can be set for either 115 V or 230 V. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the power supply.

Repair information
232
 5027

Note: If there is no switch, the LVPS automatically senses the line voltage.

Fuser exit sensor removal

1 Remove the right cover assembly. See “Right cover assembly removal” on page 238.
2 Remove the bin-full/narrow media sensor flag. See “Bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag removal” on
page 237.
3 Press to unsnap the tabs (A), and gently rotate the exit deflector to remove.

4 Remove the right out put bin deflector. See “Right output bin deflector removal” on page 277.

Repair information
233
 5027

5 Disconnect the cable (B) from the bin‑full/narrow media sensor, and unroute the cable from its retainer.

6 Unhook the springs (C) from both sides of the fuser.

7 Disconnect the thermistor cables (E), and pull them over the retainer.

Repair information
234
 5027

8 Remove the screw and grounding washer (F) on the right side of the frame.

Note: Be careful to not lose the grounding washer.

9 Rotate the top of the fuser toward the front, and then slide to the left to align the fuser side frames with the
flat area of the shaft.
10 Disconnect the cable (G), and remove the screw (H) from the fuser exit sensor.

Repair information
235
 5027

11 Remove the lower end of the sensor with a flat screwdriver, and gently pull the sensor from the frame.

Repair information
236
 5027

Bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag removal

Note: The exit deflector and bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag are in the same FRU and should be replaced
together.
1 Open the front cover.
2 Press upward on the tab (A) to unsnap the bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag, and remove the flag.

Note: Be careful to not dislodge the sensor.

Repair information
237
 5027

Speaker removal
1 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover assembly removal” on page 219.
2 Disconnect the cable (A), and remove the two screws (B).

3 Remove the speaker.

Right side removals

Right cover assembly removal

1 Open the toner supply door.
2 Open the front door.

Repair information
238
 5027

3 Release the latches (A), and lift off the cover.

Toner supply door removal

1 Press in on the latch to open the toner supply door.
2 Remove the screw (B).

3 Remove the toner supply door.

Repair information
239
 5027

Fuser drive motor assembly removal

1 Remove the right cover assembly. See “Right cover assembly removal” on page 238.
2 Disconnect the cable (A) from the fuser drive motor assembly.
Note: If you remove the toroid (B) from the cable, be sure to return the toroid to the cable when
reinstalling.
3 Remove the two screws (C).

4 Remove the fuser drive motor assembly.

Toner meter cycle (TMC) card removal

1 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
3 Disconnect the TMC cable from JCTM1 connector (A), and push the toner meter cycle card cable through
the frame opening.
Note: Pay close attention to the routing of the cable for reinstallation.

Repair information
240
 5027

4 Remove the two plastic screws (B), and the two metal screws (C).

5 Slide a flat‑blade screwdriver into the left side of the frame, and pry the card loose to remove.

Repair information
241
 5027

Installation notes:
• Be sure the cable (D) runs through the retainer.
• The toner meter cycle card is a tight fit. Insert the bottom edge inside the frame, and then push down
on the top edge to clear the top cover.

Toner density sensor (TDS) (left or right sensor) removal

Note: The toner density sensor is also called the toner patch sensor (TPS).
Note: The toner density sensors are the same, but the left sensor has a thermistor attached which needs to
be removed when you install a new TDS on the left side. Reinstall the thermistor on the new TDS.
1 Remove the image transfer unit. See “Image transfer unit (ITU) removal” on page 249.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
3 Disconnect the toner density sensor cable from JTDS1 connector (A) or JTDS2 connector (B) on the controller
board. If you are removing the left toner density sensor, also disconnect the thermistor from JFUSES1
connector (C) on the controller board.

Note: Be sure to pay close attention to the routing of all cables for reinstallation.

Repair information
242
 5027

4 Remove the four screws (D) from the left and right sensors.

Installation notes:
• Before beginning the installation of the new left or right toner density sensor, note the 32-digit TPS value
printed on the barcode on the new FRU.
• After installation, perform the TPS Setup. Enter the factory preset alignment number.
a Enter the Diagnostics Menu:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Press and hold Left and Select.

3 Turn the printer on.

4 Release the buttons when the installed memory and processor speed displays.
b Select TPS SETUP from Diag Menu, and press Select.
c Select Right or Left, and press Select.
TPS Right 1‑16 or Left 1‑16 appears above a blinking 0 in the left position.
d To enter a character or digit:
1 Press Left to decrease or Right to increase the blinking value.
2 Pause for several seconds without pushing any buttons. The blinking value becomes solid. If the
value is incorrect, then press Back to go back and reenter the number.
3 Continue until the last value is reached.
4 When the last of the 16 values is entered and becomes solid, TPS Right 17‑32 or TPS Left
17‑32 appears.
5 Continue entering and pausing.
e After the 32nd number is entered and becomes solid, the number is automatically entered.
– If the number is incorrect, then Checksum does not match appears, and the original screen
appears to reenter the value.
– If the number is correct, then Saving changes to NVRAM appears.

Repair information
243
 5027

Developer unit removal

Note: The developer units are not FRUs.
1 Open the toner access door.
2 Remove the toner cartridges.

3 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging unit. This could damage it.

Repair information
244
 5027

4 Remove the developer unit(s).

High‑voltage power supply (HVPS) removal

1 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
2 For the CS510 model only, remove the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on page 300.
3 Remove the cable cover (A).

Repair information
245
 5027

4 Disconnect the high‑voltage power supply cable (B) from the controller board.
Note: Some connectors contain a latch that has to be disengaged while removing the cable.

5 Remove the image transfer unit. See “Image transfer unit (ITU) removal” on page 249.
6 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
7 Remove the screw (C) securing the HVPS.

8 Remove the left cover assembly. See “Left cover assembly removal” on page 219.

Repair information
246
 5027

9 Press down on the spring mount, and carefully slide the HVPS out by pulling from one side and pushing
from the other. Release the pressure on the spring mount, and pull the HVPS the remaining distance.

10 Slide the HVPS out to remove.

11 Press down on the latch (D) to disconnect the cable from the HVPS board.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid personal injury or printer damage after disconnecting the
high-voltage power cable from the controller board, always check that the HVPS connection was not
loosened. Make this check anytime you are working near the HVPS cable.

Repair information
247
 5027

Installation notes:
a To install the new HVPS board, insert the spring end of the HVPS board while compressing the spring,
as shown below.

b Slide the HVPS into position while holding its sides, as shown below. Do not allow the card to flex and
touch the cage.

Repair information
248
 5027

c Check the position of the card at the left side of the printer. The small vertical post (E) in the endcap has
to be positioned in the hole above it, as show below.

d Install the new cable making sure the connector to the board is locked into position.
Note: Reinstall the screw to hold the HVPS to the right side of the printer.

Image transfer unit (ITU) removal

1 Write down the number of the new ITU before installing it. You will need the 16-digit numeric value from the
barcode after the installation, and it is easier to see at this point.

2 Remove the right cover assembly. See “Right cover assembly removal” on page 238.
3 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
4 Remove the imaging unit (IU). See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.

Repair information
249
 5027

5 Disconnect the two springs (A, B) from the side frames, leaving the right one (A) attached to the ITU spring
clamp.

6 Unhook the left spring (B), and the cam away from the ITU so the spring is held out of the ITU path.

7 Place the tip of a flat-head screwdriver in between the release lever (C) and the frame.

Repair information
250
 5027

8 Rotate the screwdriver to rotate the release lever and decouple the ITU while pulling the ITU toward the
front.

Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the lever is in the fully released position before removing the
ITU drive to avoid damage.

9 Hold the release lever as you pull out the ITU for the first four inches (100 mm), but a quick, firm pull should
overcome the latch at this point.
Installation notes:
1 Write down the 16-digit numeric value of the new FRU before you begin to install it.
2 Do not rotate the release lever again to install the new ITU. Doing so could cause the ITU to be seated
incorrectly. The coupler will be rotated out of the way as the ITU slides in.

Repair information
251
 5027

3 Rotate the right side spring clamp (D) and left side cam back to their original positions, and then re-hook
the springs.

4 When you have replaced the ITU, be sure to enter the 16-digit numeric value from the barcode on the new
ITU into the printer. See “ITU Barcode” on page 180.
Note: For a video demonstration, see the Image Transfer Unit Remove and Install Video at
http://infoserve.lexmark.com/videos/CSX_ITU.html

Imaging unit (IU) removal

Note: The imaging unit is a customer replacement unit and is not a FRU.
Note: The imaging unit contains:
• Photoconductor unit
• Developer units
To remove only the photoconductor, remove the entire imaging unit, remove the developer units, place the
original developer units in the new photoconductor, and re-install the imaging unit. When you replace the
imaging kit, you are replacing both the photoconductor and the developer units.
1 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
2 Remove the toner cartridges.

Repair information
252
 5027

3 Lift the two latches (A) to unlock the imaging unit.

4 Pull the two latches until the imaging unit meets resistance.

5 Press and hold the handles (B) on the right and left sides, and pull the imaging unit straight out.
Note: Avoid touching the bottom of the imaging unit.

Repair information
253
 5027

Toner cartridge contacts removal

1 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
3 Remove the rear screw (A) in the waste toner bottle sensor contact to allow access to the cable cover.
Note: The waste toner bottle sensor contact does not need to be unplugged or removed.
4 Remove the four screws (B) securing the cable cover, and remove the cable cover.

5 Rotate the printer to view the right side.

6 Lay the printer on its left side, and remove the screw (C) securing the spring contacts.

Repair information
254
 5027

7 Release the tabs (D) on the spring contact, and slide to the left to remove.

8 Disconnect the cable (E) from the controller board at JSC1.

9 Remove the cable from the retainer on the bottom of the printer.
10 Extract the cable through the frame, and remove the cable with the spring contacts.
Note: To remove the cable, be sure to unwrap the toroid. When reinstalling, be sure to wrap the toroid
five times as shown below.

Repair information
255
 5027

Waste toner bottle removal

Note: The waste toner bottle is not a FRU.
1 Remove the right cover assembly. See “Right cover assembly removal” on page 238.
2 Press the two tabs (A) to remove the waste toner bottle.

Repair information
256
 5027

Waste toner bottle contact block removal

Note: The waste toner bottle is not a FRU.
1 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
2 Remove the screw (A) from the back of the waste toner bottle block.

3 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.

Repair information
257
 5027

4 Disconnect the waste toner bottle contact block (B) from the controller board.

5 Remove the waste toner bottle contact block.

Front removals

Front cover assembly removal

1 Position the printer with the front at the edge of the table.
2 Remove the media tray.
3 Remove the logo plate. See “Operator panel logo plate removal” on page 268.
4 Remove the operator panel. For CS310 models, see “Operator panel removal (for CS310 models only)”
on page 260. For CS410 models, see “Operator panel removal (for CS410 models only)” on page 262.
For CS510, see “Operator panel removal (for CS510 models only)” on page 265.
5 Remove the operator panel cable through the front upper cover.
Note: If the printer has a USB cable, then remove it from the front cover. See the picture on how to slide
the USB connector through the front upper cover.

Repair information
258
 5027

6 Remove the four screws (A) and the five screws (B) from the front cover.

7 Remove the cable cover and the front cover switch.

8 Lower the front cover to align the flats on the hinges, and remove the front cover.

Repair information
259
 5027

Operator panel bezel removal

1 Remove the operator panel logo plate. See “Operator panel logo plate removal” on page 268.
2 Use a flat‑head screwdriver to pry the bezel loose, and remove.

Operator panel removal (for CS310 models only)

Installation warning: Replace one of the following components, and perform a POR before replacing a
second component. Never replace both of the components without performing a POR after installing each
one, or the printer may be rendered inoperable:
• Operator panel assembly
• Controller board
Note: The UICC card is part of the operator panel.
1 Remove the operator panel bezel. See “Operator panel bezel removal” on page 260.
2 Open the front cover.

Repair information
260
 5027

3 Remove the four screws (A) from the front cover assembly.

4 Remove the three screws (B), and remove the operator panel.

Repair information
261
 5027

5 Slide the lever (D) forward, and disconnect the operator panel cable (C) from the operator panel.

Operator panel removal (for CS410 models only)

Installation warning: Replace one of the following components, and perform a POR before replacing a
second component. Never replace both of the components without performing a POR after installing each
one, or the printer may be rendered inoperable:
• UICC card and display
• Controller board
1 Remove the operator panel bezel. See “Operator panel bezel removal” on page 260.
2 Open the front cover.

Repair information
262
 5027

3 Remove the four screws (A) from the front cover assembly.

4 Slide the lever (B), and disconnect the operator panel cable (C) from the operator panel.

Repair information
263
 5027

5 Remove the five screws (D).

6 Turn the UICC card over, and remove the two screws (E) from the operator panel support bracket.

7 Remove the UICC card and display.

Repair information
264
 5027

Operator panel removal (for CS510 models only)

Installation warning: Replace one of the following components, and perform a POR before replacing a
second component. Never replace both of the components without performing a POR after installing each
one, or the printer may be rendered inoperable:
• UICC card
• Controller board
1 Remove the operator panel bezel. See “Operator panel bezel removal” on page 260.
2 Open the front cover.
3 Remove the four screws (A) from the front cover assembly.

Repair information
265
 5027

4 Rotate the two levers (B) from each cable, and disconnect the two operator panel cables (C) from the operator
panel.

5 Remove the three screws (D) from the back cover of the operator panel.

Repair information
266
 5027

6 Remove the back cover of the operator panel.

7 Remove the five screws (E) from the UICC card.

8 Remove the UICC card.

9 Remove the four screws (F) from the operator display support bracket.

10 Remove the operator display support bracket.

11 Remove the operator panel display.

Repair information
267
 5027

Operator panel logo plate removal

1 Open the front cover.
2 With a flat‑blade screwdriver, release the two latches (A) on the inside over.

Repair information
268
 5027

3 Remove the logo plate (B).

USB port connector removal

Note: The FRU includes the USB port connector and cable.
1 Remove the operator panel. See “Operator panel removal (for CS310 models only)” on page 260,
“Operator panel removal (for CS410 models only)” on page 262, or “Operator panel removal (for CS510
models only)” on page 265.
2 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
3 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
4 Remove the rear screw (A) from the waste toner bottle sensor contact to allow access to the cable cover.
Note: The waste toner bottle sensor contact does not need to be unplugged or removed.

Repair information
269
 5027

5 Remove the four screws (B) from the cable cover.

6 Disconnect the USB port cable (C) from the controller board.
Note: The picture below shows the position of the cable in the CS310 and CS410 models (left) and the
CS510 models (right).

Repair information
270
 5027

7 Remove the USB port cable (D) from the cable channel on the right side.

Duplex reference edge removal

1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the two screws (A), the two screws (B), the two screws (C), and the two screws (D) in the back of
the duplex aligner.

Repair information
271
 5027

3 Lift the duplex aligner on the right side, and disengage the gears (E) on the left.

4 Remove the three screws (F) from the duplex reference guide, and remove the guide.

Installation notes:
a Align the duplex reference guide so that the tabs are inserted into the slots, and the top of the reference
guide fits under the door ribs.
b Replace the three screws in the duplex reference guide.
c Be sure that the shaft and bearing have not shifted out of the guide. If they have, then make sure that
the bearing on the left is aligned with the slot (G) facing down (towards the front door).
Note: Improperly aligned bearings or seated shafts may cause vibration and nose in the front door.

Repair information
272
 5027

d Align the duplex aligner guide so that the gears (H) mesh on the left.

e Replace the eight screws in the duplex aligner.

f Close the front door.

Fuser assembly removal

1 Remove the right cover assembly. See “Right cover assembly removal” on page 238.
2 Remove the left cover assembly. See “Left cover assembly removal” on page 219.
3 Disconnect the two‑wire fuser cable (A) from the LVPS.
4 Position the fuser cable so that it can be pulled through from the front of the printer, and guide the cable
through to the front.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to damage the cable by pulling too hard or cutting the cable
insulation.

Repair information
273
 5027

5 Remove the bin-full/narrow media sensor flag. See “Bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag removal” on
page 237.
6 Remove the right out put bin deflector. See “Right output bin deflector removal” on page 277.
7 Disconnect the cable (C) from the bin‑full/narrow media sensor, and unroute the cable from its retainer.

8 Unhook the springs (D) from both sides of the fuser.

9 Disconnect the thermistor cables (E), and pull them over the retainer.

Repair information
274
 5027

10 Remove the screw and grounding washer (F) on the right side of the frame.

Note: Be careful to not lose the grounding washer.

11 Rotate the top of the fuser toward the front, and then slide to the left to align the fuser side frames with the
flat area of the shaft.
12 Lift the fuser, and remove.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful to not interfere with or damage the fuser exit sensor to the left
of the fuser when rotating.
Note: For a video demonstration, see the Fuser Remove and Install Video at
http://infoserve.lexmark.com/videos/CSX_fuser.html

Exit deflector removal

1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the yellow toner cartridge.
3 Remove the exit deflector ground screw (A), and remove the cable from its retainers.
Note: Be sure to pay close attention to the routing of the cables through the retainers for reinstallation.

Repair information
275
 5027

4 Press to unsnap the tabs (B), and gently rotate the deflector to remove.

Repair information
276
 5027

Right output bin deflector removal

1 Open the front cover.
2 Pull up on the right output bin deflector (A), and remove.

Bottom removals

Pick tires removal

Note: You will need to have a soft, padded work surface for this removal.
Warning—Potential Damage: Remove only the rubber tires and not the paper pick tire assembly to avoid
losing small parts.
Note: The paper pick tires for the standard media tray are located in the base printer. There are also tires in
the optional 650-sheet Duo Drawer/MP feeder and the optional 550-sheet drawer. If you have one or both of
these additional options, and you are having problems with media picking, replace these tires also. Always
replace the paper pick tires in pairs. The tires come in a package of two.
1 Remove the media tray.
2 Lower the paper pick motor drive assembly.

Repair information
277
 5027

3 Remove the rubber tire (A) from the pick roll assembly (B). Repeat for the other tire.

Installation note:
Install the new rubber tires with the surface texture turning in the direction as shown below.

Note: Feel each rubber surface to verify it turns properly in the direction shown. The smoother surface
pushes the paper toward the front of the printer.

Repair information
278
 5027

Lower left frame removal

Note: The right and left lower frames are in the same FRU.
1 Remove the media tray, and remove the screw (A) from the front.

2 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
3 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
4 Disconnect the three cables (B) from the LVPS.

Repair information
279
 5027

5 Remove the two top screws (C) near the front holding the top cover to the LVPS shield.

6 Position the fuser cable (D) so that it can be pulled through from the front of the printer, and guide the cable
through to the front.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to damage the cable by pulling too hard or cutting the cable
insulation.

7 Remove the bin-full/narrow media sensor flag. See “Bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag removal” on
page 237.

Repair information
280
 5027

8 Press to unsnap the tabs (E), and gently rotate the exit deflector to remove.

9 Remove the right out put bin deflector. See “Right output bin deflector removal” on page 277.
10 Disconnect the cable (F) from the bin‑full/narrow media sensor, and unroute the cable from its retainer.

Repair information
281
 5027

11 Unhook the springs (G) from both sides of the fuser.

12 Disconnect the thermistor cables (H), and pull them over the retainer.
13 Remove the screw and grounding washer (I) on the right side of the frame.

Note: Be careful to not lose the grounding washer.

14 Rotate the top of the fuser toward the front, and then slide to the left to align the fuser side frames with the
flat area of the shaft.

Repair information
282
 5027

15 Disconnect the fuser exit sensor cable (J).

16 Lift the front left corner of the top cover, and tilt the LVPS cage (K) to remove. There are two posts at the
bottom of the cage on the left side that need to be disengaged.
Note: Be careful with the fuser exit sensor which remains with the cage.

17 Place the printer on its right side.

Repair information
283
 5027

18 Remove the tray 2 connector (L) by pinching the tabs together and pushing the connector into the printer.

19 At the rear of the printer, remove the two screws (M) from the AC receptacle, and the ground screw (N), and
the two screws (O) holding the plastic shield.

20 Remove the AC receptacle from the left lower frame.

Repair information
284
 5027

21 Remove the three screws (P) securing the left lower frame.

22 Remove the screw (Q) above the frame.

Repair information
285
 5027

23 Swing the left lower frame away from the printer, and remove.

Lower right frame removal

1 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
2 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
3 Remove the screw (A) in the waste toner bottle sensor contact to allow access to the cable cover, and remove
the four screws (B) securing the cable cover.

Notes:
• The waste toner bottle sensor contact does not need to be unplugged.
• The cable cover is part of the right lower frame FRU.
4 Carefully place the printer on its left side.
5 Remove the three screws (D) securing the lower right frame to the printer.

Repair information
286
 5027

6 Remove the screw (E) closer to the front of the printer.

7 Next to screw (E), lift the right lower frame pin (F) out of the hole in the printer frame.

Repair information
287
 5027

8 Swing the rear part away from the printer to access the spring, and remove the spring (G) from the right
lower frame.

9 Disconnect the cable (H) from the tray present sensor.

10 Swing the rear of the lower frame away from the printer, and remove the right lower frame.
Note: There are parts in the right lower frame that are not included in the frame. The following
instructions show how to remove them.

Repair information
288
 5027

11 Remove the screw (L), and remove the spring bracket.

Note: For non-wireless models, remove the screw, and remove plate from your printer if it does not have
a wireless antenna.
Installation notes:
a Reinstall the spring bracket and the wireless antenna plate (or the blank plate).
b Connect the cable to the tray present sensor, and put the spring in place before installing the right lower
frame.

Repair information
289
 5027

Duplex sensor removal

1 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
2 Remove the two screws (A) from the cable cover.

3 Pull the corner of the cable cover (B) away from the right side to access the two sensor posts (C).

Repair information
290
 5027

4 Remove the sensor plate (D).

5 Push in on the latches to disconnect the duplex sensor from the printer.
6 Disconnect the cable (E) from the duplex sensor.

Installation notes:
a Clean the contact surface where you removed the sensor retaining plate, or where you need to install
the new one.
b Install the new sensor.
Note: Make sure the clamps on the legs of the sensor latch to the metal frame.
c Remove the backing from the new plate, and place the plate on the surface between the sensor mounting
lets.

ITU guide removal

1 Remove the paper tray.
2 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover assembly removal” on page 238.

Repair information
291
 5027

3 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
4 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
5 Remove the image transfer unit. See “Image transfer unit (ITU) removal” on page 249.
6 Remove the fuser. See “Fuser assembly removal” on page 273.
7 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover assembly removal” on page 219.
8 Remove the LVPS. See “Low‑voltage power supply (LVPS) assembly removal” on page 232.
9 Remove the LVPS cage. See “EP drive assembly removal” on page 221.
10 Remove the screw (A) and spring (B).

A B

11 Remove the two screws securing the ITU guide to the frame.
Note: Use either a short #2 Phillips or a right angle screwdriver.

Repair information
292
 5027

12 Remove the spring (C).

Note: Pay attention on how the spring is attached to the bail.

Repair information
293
 5027

13 Press and hold the ITU drive coupling (D) using a spring hook or screwdriver, and then tilt the ITU guide up
from the side with the screw holes to remove.

Tray present sensor removal

1 Remove the media tray.
2 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
3 Remove the rear screw (A) in the waste toner bottle sensor contact to allow access to the cable cover.
Note: The waste toner bottle sensor contact does not need to be unplugged or removed.
4 Remove the four screws (B) from the cable cover, and remove the cable cover.

Repair information
294
 5027

5 Remove the sensor retaining plate (C), and then pinch the latches together to remove the tray present sensor.

6 Disconnect the tray present sensor cable.

Installation notes:
a Clean the contact surface where you removed the sensor retaining plate, or where you need to install
the new one.
Install the sensor.
b Remove the backing from the new plate, and place the plate on the surface between the sensor mounting
posts.
c Connect the cable to the tray present sensor.
d Replace the spring.

Paper pick motor drive assembly standard tray removal

1 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
2 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
3 Remove the left cover assembly. See “Left cover assembly removal” on page 219.
4 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
5 Disconnect the paper pick motor drive assembly cable connector (A) from JSP1 on the controller board.

Repair information
295
 5027

6 Pull the cable (B) through the opening, and free the cables from their retainers (C) on the left.

7 Partially reinstall the rear cover to protect the controller board, and turn the printer so that the rear cover
rests on the table. The bottom should be facing you.
Warning—Potential Damage: For models with a wireless antenna, use supports to prevent the antenna
from taking the weight of the printer.
8 Place the printer on its rear, and remove the two screws (D) from the bottom.

Repair information
296
 5027

9 On the right side, loosen the screw (E) with a screwdriver, and hold the paper feed roller assembly in place
as you use your fingers to remove the screw.

10 Move the right side of the paper feed roller assembly out to free the shaft from the opening in the frame.
Note: Pay close attention to the location of the shaft and opening for reinstallation.
11 Remove the paper feed roller assembly.
Note: Be careful not to lose the springs.
Installation notes:
a Place the left side of the paper feed roller assembly in the printer. Make sure the shaft on the left side
aligns with the hole in the frame.
b Install the left spring (F).
c Reinstall the three screws holding the paper feed roller assembly to the printer.
d Turn the printer to the proper upright position.
e Reroute the cable, making sure to place the cables into the two retainers on the left side.
f Remove the rear cover, and reconnect the cable.
g Replace the rear cover.

Repair information
297
 5027

h Install the right spring (F).

Rear side removals

Rear cover removal

Note: The rear cover is not a field replaceable unit (FRU).
1 Remove the eight screws (A).

Repair information
298
 5027

2 Swing the side of the cover out, and slide to the left to remove.

3 Remove the rear cover.

Installation note: When installing the rear cover, be sure that the bracket (B) is positioned behind the ear
(C).

Repair information
299
 5027

Controller board removal

Note: Back up the eSF solutions and settings before replacing the controller board. For more information,
see “Backing up eSF solutions and settings” on page 204.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid personal injury or printer damage after disconnecting the high-
voltage power cable from the controller board, always check that the HVPS connection was not
loosened. Make this check anytime you are working near the HVPS cable.
Warning—Potential Damage: Observe all ESD precautions while handling electrostatic discharge sensitive
parts. See Handling ESD‑sensitive parts on page 4‑1.
Warning—Potential Damage: Replace one of the following components, and perform a POR before
replacing a second component. Never replace both of the components without performing a POR after
installing each one, or the printer may be rendered inoperable:
• UICC
• Controller board
1 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
2 If the printer has a wireless card, then disconnect the JSC1 cable from the controller board.
3 Remove the screw (A) securing the ground cable and USB ground contact on the controller board cage.

Installation note: Make sure to install the ground cable and USB ground contact on the controller board
cage after installing a new controller board.
4 Disconnect all cables from the controller board, and then remove the six screws (B).

Repair information
300
 5027

Note: Do not use tools when disconnecting the ribbon cables from the JPH1 and JLCD1 connectors on
the controller board to avoid damage.

5 Remove the controller board.

6 Remove all USB grounding contacts (C) from the controller board.
Installation notes:
• Install the USB grounding contacts on the new controller board.

Repair information
301
 5027

• After replacing the controller board, perform the motor detect test (see “Motor Detect” on page 170),
and the printer configuration restoration (see “Restoring the printer configuration after replacing the
controller board” on page 199).
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing the controller board, verify that the cable from the high-
voltage power supply is properly seated. The cable may have been loosened from the HVPS. Print a few
pages to verify the installation. If the pages are blank, then confirm that the high-voltage power supply
cable is properly seated. The connector may have been loosened at the HVPS. A blank page that should
have toner on it could be an indication that toner is applied to the ITU belt but is not transferred.
Therefore the toner goes into the ITU cleaner which cannot process massive amounts of toner. It is
important to prevent extensive blank pages from being processed if they should have toner on them.

Top side removals

Top cover assembly removal

1 Remove the right cover assembly. See “Right cover assembly removal” on page 238.
2 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 256.
3 Remove the imaging unit. See “Imaging unit (IU) removal” on page 252.
4 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 298.
5 Disconnect the fan cable from JFAN1 (A) on the controller board, and remove the screw (B).

Repair information
302
 5027

6 Remove the two screws (C), unroute the ground cable from the cover, and then lift to slide the paper stop
to expose the screw (D). Remove the screw.

7 Remove the top two screws (E) near the front.

Repair information
303
 5027

8 Remove the remaining four screws (F), and the fuser screw (G).

9 Disconnect the left spring (H) and the right spring (I) from the fuser.

10 Unroute the bin‑full/narrow media sensor cable (J) from its retainer.

Repair information
304
 5027

11 Gently rotate the fuser away from the top cover, and let it rest.
Note: If the fuser needs to be propped up, then use something that will not move or shift. Avoid putting
additional stress on the cables.
12 Push in on the cover above the locating pins (K) while lifting to disconnect the cover.

13 Carefully lift the cover while keeping it horizontal, and guide the fan connector through the opening.

Bin‑full/narrow media sensor removal

1 Open the front cover.
2 Unroute the cable (A) from its retainer.
Note: Be sure to pay close attention to the routing of the cable for re‑installation.

Repair information
305
 5027

3 Disconnect the cable (B) from the bin‑full/narrow media sensor.

4 Remove the sensor retaining plate (C).

5 Gently remove the sensor from the bracket by pressing in on the latches (D).

Installation notes:
• Clean the contact surface where you removed the sensor retaining plate, or where you need to install the
new one.
• Guide the latches that hold the sensor in the bracket into place.
• Squeeze the latches together until they latch to the metal frame.
• Remove
the backing from the new plate, and place the plate on the surface between the sensor mounting legs.
• Reconnect the cable, and reroute the cable through the retainer.

Repair information
306
 5027

Printhead removal
1 Remove the top cover assembly. See “Top cover assembly removal” on page 302.
2 Disconnect the printhead cable (A) and the ribbon cable (B) from the controller board.

Note: Use care when disconnecting and handling the ribbon cable to prevent cable damage.
3 Remove the three screws (C).

4 Remove the printhead.

Repair information
307
 5027

Installation notes:
• When the printhead is replaced, perform the registration (black planes) and alignment (color planes). See
“REGISTRATION” on page 167and “Setting alignment for color” on page 169.
• Be sure to replace the toroid on the cable when you reinstall the printhead, and push the toriod between
the connector and the top frame so that the weight is not supported by the cable.

Options removals
• “650‑sheet duo drawer tray assembly removal” on page 308
• “650‑sheet duo drawer assembly removal” on page 309
• “Dust cover removal” on page 310
• “Pick tire removal” on page 311

650‑sheet duo drawer tray assembly removal

1 Pull out the drawer tray assembly.
2 Remove the tray assembly.

Repair information
308
 5027

650‑sheet duo drawer assembly removal

Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure the printer is turned off before removing the drawer assembly.
1 Carefully lift the printer, and set it aside on a flat surface.
2 Remove the 650‑sheet drawer assembly.

Repair information
309
 5027

Dust cover removal

1 Slightly raise the dust cover.
2 Pull the dust cover to remove.

Repair information
310
 5027

Pick tire removal

1 Remove the drawer tray assembly.
2 Lower the auto compensator mechanism (A).

3 Remove the rubber tires (B) from the pick roll assembly (C). Repeat for the other tire (D).

B
C

Installation note: Install the new rubber tire with its surface texture turning in the direction as shown.

Repair information
311
 5027

Note: Feel each rubber surface to verify it turns properly in the direction shown.

Repair information
312
 5027

Component locations
Controller board connectors
CS310

Component locations
313
 5027

CS410

Component locations
314
 5027

CS510

Component locations
315
 5027

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JBIN1 Bin-full/narrow media sensor and fuser 1 V_BF
exit sensor
2 S_BIN_FB, +3.3 V dc
• Bin-full/narrow media—pins 1–3
3 Ground
• Fuser exit sensor—pins 4–6
4 V_BIN_4
5 FUSER_EXIT_SNSR, +3.3 V dc
6 Ground
JCARTB1 Drive motor for cartridges 1 CART1_HALL_U
• Black drive motor (rear motor) even 2 NC_CARTB1_2
pin numbers 2–20
3 +CART1_HALL_V
• CMY (color) drive motor odd pin
numbers 1–19 4 V_CART2_WING_W, +24 V dc
5 CART1_HALL_W
6 V_CART2_WING_V, +24 V dc
7 CART1_PG
8 V_CART2_WIND_U, +24 V dc
9 Ground
10 +5 V dc_SW
11 +5V dc_SW
12 Ground
13 V_CARTR1_WIND_U, +24 V dc
14 CART2_FG
15 V_CARTR1_WIND_V, +24 V dc
16 CART2_HALL_W
17 V_CARTR1_WIND_W, +24 V dc
18 CART2_HALL_V
19 NC_JCARTB1_19
20 CART2_HALL_U
JCTM1 Toner meter connector 1 +5V_SW
2 CART_METER_C_IN
3 CART_METER_M_IN
4 CART_METER_Y_IN
5 CART_METER_K_IN
6 Ground

Component locations
316
 5027

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JCVR1 Cover open switch 1 V_24V_CVR, +24 V dc
2 COVER_OPEN (cover open +0 V dc; cover
closed +24 V dc)
JFAN1 System fan 1 FAN_FG, +3.3 V dc
2 Ground
3 V_FAN_P3
JFUSES1 • Fuser 1 V_FUSER_PHA+, +24 V dc (doors closed)
• Motor pins—1–4 2 V_FUSER_PHA–, +24 V dc (doors closed)
• Thermistor—black wire 5–6
3 V_FUSER_PHB+, +24 V dc (doors closed)
• Duplex sensor (S1)—7–9
4 V_FUSER_PHB–, +24 V dc (doors closed)
• Thermistor—white wire 10–11
5 FUSER_HQ_THM, +2.3 V dc
6 FUSER_HK_THM_RTN, ground
7 +5V_SW, +5 V dc
8 Ground
9 S1_MPF_SNS, +3.3 V dc
10 BUR_THM, +2.5 V dc
11 FUSER_BUR_THM_RTN, ground
12 Ground, (no wire)
JHVPS1 Developer/transfer HVPS 1 M_DEV_PWM_OUT
2 K_DEV_PWM_OUT
3 C_DEV_PWM_OUT
4 CMY_CHG)PWM_OUT
5 Y_DEV_PWM_OUT
6 K_CHG_PWM_OUT
7 CMY_SRVO_OUT, +3.3 V dc
8 ITM_TX_PWM_OUT
9 CMY_TX_PWM_OUT
10 ITM_SRVO_OUT, +3.3 V dc
11 K_SRVO_OUT, +3.3 V dc
12 K_TX_PWM_OUT
13 +24 V dc
14 Ground
15 5V_HVPS_REF
16 Ground

Component locations
317
 5027

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JINT1 +5V safety interlock connector 1 VS_JINT–1, +5 V dc
2 Ground
3 VS_INT, +5 V dc (door closed), 0 V dc (open)
JLCD2 Operator panel connector for CS410 and N/A N/A
CS510 models
JLVPS1 Low-voltage power supply 1 +5 V dc
2 Ground
3 +5 V dc
4 Ground
5 +5 V dc
6 Ground
7 +24 V dc
8 Ground
9 +24 V dc
10 Ground
11 +24 V dc
12 Ground
13 RELAY_DRIVE
14 ZERO_XING_IN
15 HEAT1_ON
16 Ground
JMIRR1 Mirror motor connector 1 MM_REFR
2 MM_LOCK, +3.3 V dc
3 MM_START
4 Ground
5 +24 V dc
JOP1 Operator panel connector for CS310 N/A N/A
models only

Component locations
318
 5027

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JOPT1 Optional—Tray(s) 1 TXD_PP
2 Ground
3 Ground
4 RXD_PP
5 +24 V dc
6 Ground
7 +5V_OPTIONS, +5 V dc
8 S2
9 Ground
10 Ground
JPH1 Printhead flat cable connector
JSC1 SC cartridge 1 +3.3 V dc
2 DATA_SC, +3.3 V dc
3 SCK_SC
4 Ground
JSP1 Smart pick drive (paper pick motor drive 1 ANODE (no wire)
assembly)
2 M1_OUT1, +24 V dc (0 V dc with door open)
• Encoder—pins 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9
3 Ground (no wire)
• Smart pick—pins 2, 4
• Motor—pins6, 8, 10, 12 4 M1_OUT2, +24 V dc (0 V dc with door open)
• Input (S2) sensor—pins 13–16 5 VCC, 5 V_SW
6 Ground (no wire)
7 Ground
8 CATHODE
9 VOUTA
10 +5 V dc
11 VOUTB
12 5 V_SW
13 Ground (no wire)
14 ANODE
15 +5 V dc
16 Ground
JTHM1 TPS thermistor connector 1 TPS_THERM_SNS, +1.5 V dc
2 TPS_SNS_RTN, ground

Component locations
319
 5027

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JTPS1 TPS1 connector 1 CATHODE
2 ANODE
3 Ground (no wire)
4 +5V_SW
5 Ground
JTPS2 TPS2 connector 1 ANODE
2 CATHODE
3 Ground (no wire)
4 +5 V_SW
5 Ground
JTRAY1 Bottle sensors 1 +5V_SW
2 DUPLEX_ENT, +5 V dc
3 Ground
JUSB1 Port USB connector N/A N/A
JUSBW1 USB wireless connector 1 Ground
2 USB_HST_VP
3 USB_HST_VM
4 Ground
5 +5 V dc
6 +3.3 V dc
JWT1 Waste toner detection 1 SENSE
2 VREF
3 +1.5 V dc
4 Ground (no wire)

Component locations
320
 5027

Maintenance
• “Inspection guide” on page 321
• “Scheduled maintenance” on page 322
• “Preventive maintenance” on page 322
• “Lubrication specification” on page 323
• “Cleaning the printer” on page 323

Inspection guide
The purpose of this Inspection guide is to aid you in identifying the intervals, based on page count, at which
parts must be Inspected (for visible physical damage), cleaned, or replaced.
If any unsafe conditions exist, find out how serious the hazard could be and if you can continue before you
correct the hazard.
As you service the machine, check for the following:
• Damaged, missing, or altered parts, especially in the area of the On/Off switch and the power supply
• Damaged, missing, or altered covers, especially in the area of the top cover and the power supply cover
• Possible safety exposure from any non-Lexmark attachments
Use the following tables to determine when specified parts should be Inspected:
Lexmark CS310, CS410, and Every service Every 85K Notes
CS510 call
Media tray - All
Media tray side guides Inspect Check for correct positioning
Media tray length guides Inspect Check for correct positioning
Transfer module (ITM) Inspect Replace Ensure correct installation
Fuser Inspect Replace Ensure correct installation
Media feeders - All
Media tray pick tires Inspect, clean if needed Clean with a damp cloth
MPF pick tires Inspect, clean if needed Clean with a damp cloth
Paper path
Duplex path rollers Inspect Check for media fragments and tears
Check for excessive toner buildup on white rollers
Clean with damp cloth if needed
Miscellaneous
Toner spillage Clean Use a toner vacuum and cloth to remove all toner
spillage from the printer

Maintenance
321
 5027

Scheduled maintenance
The operator panel displays the message 80 or Scheduled Maintenance when it reaches certain page counts.
It is necessary to replace the appropriate maintenance kit at certain intervals to maintain the print quality and
reliability of the printer. If needed, reset the maintenance counter after performing scheduled maintenance.

Maintenance kits
After 85,000 printed pages (sides) a maintenance kit may be required.
It is necessary to replace the fuser assembly and ITU to maintain the print quality and reliability of the printer.
The parts are available as a maintenance kit with the following part numbers:
Part number and kit Contents
40X7615—115V Maintenance Kit • 115V fuser
• ITU
40X7616—230V Maintenance Kit • 230V fuser
• ITU
40X7617—100V Maintenance Kit • 100V fuser
• ITU
When performing the scheduled maintenance procedure, the following areas should be cleaned of media dust
and toner contamination:
• Media trays
• PC cartridge area
• Developer housings area
• Transfer roll area
• Duplex area
• Standard bin
• Bridge unit area (if equipped)
• Finisher media bins (if equipped)

Preventive maintenance
Between scheduled maintenance intervals, paper feed, paper transport, and image quality problems can occur.
Some preventive maintenance procedures can help prevent issues like these.

Device‑specific preventive maintenance

To clean the touchscreen and keypad, use the LCD cleaning cloth. A single two‑step LCD cleaning cloth is
stored in the compartment beneath the exit tray. Additional cleaning cloths are available.
The following table lists the parts needed to perform preventive maintenance:
Part number Description Maintenance interval
40X0392 LCD cleaning kit As needed

Maintenance
322
 5027

Lubrication specification
Lubricate only when parts are replaced or as needed, not on a scheduled basis. Use of lubricants other than
those specified in this service manual can cause premature failure. Some unauthorized lubricants might
chemically attack polycarbonate parts.
Use the following lubricants:
• IBM no. 10 oil, PN/ 1280443 (Approved equivalents: Mobil DTE27, Shell Tellus 100, Fuchs Renolin MR30)
• IBM no. 23 grease
• Grease P/N 99A0394 and Nyogel type 744—Use this type of lubricant to lubricate the Fuser Drive Assembly.
• Nyogel 744—Use this type of lubricant to lubricate the ITU and Cartridge Drive Assemblies.
The motor drive FRUs contain the proper lubricant in the FRU. Use only the lubricant included.

Cleaning the printer

Cleaning the exterior of the printer

1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage:
Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they might damage the finish of the printer.
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.

Cleaning the printhead lenses

1 Remove the waste toner bottle.
2 Remove the imaging kit.

Maintenance
323
 5027

3 Wipe the printhead lenses (A) using a lint-free cloth.

Maintenance
324
 5027

325
 5027

Parts catalog
• “Legend” on page 326
• “Assembly 1: Covers” on page 327
• “Assembly 2: Frames” on page 331
• “Assembly 3: Electronics” on page 333
• “Assembly 4: Cables and sensors” on page 337
• “Assembly 5: Media drawers and trays” on page 339
• “Assembly 6: Options and miscellaneous” on page 341

Legend
The following column headings are used in the parts catalog:
• Asm‑index—Identifies the assembly and the item in the diagram. For example, 3‑1 indicates Assembly 3 and
item 1 in the table.
• Part number—Identifies the unique number that correlates with the part.
• Units/mach—Refers to the number of units actually used in the base machine or product.
• Units/option—Refers to the number of units in a particular option.
• Description—A brief description of the part.
The following abbreviations are used in the parts catalog:
• NS (not shown) in the Asm‑index column indicates that the part is procurable but is not pictured in the
illustration.
• PP (parts packet) in the Description column indicates that the part is contained in a parts packet.

Parts catalog
326
 5027

Assembly 1: Covers

14

13

12

Parts catalog
327
 5027

Assembly 1: Covers
Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1‑1 40X7643 1 1 Controller board cover “Controller board removal” on
(CS310, CS410) page 300
1 40X7644 1 1 Controller board cover “Controller board removal” on
(CS510, C2132) page 300
2 40X7633 1 1 Top cover assembly “Top cover assembly removal” on
page 302
3 40X7621 1 1 Toner supply door “Toner supply door removal” on
page 239
4 40X9244 1 1 Bracket, front toner door N/A
pivot
5 40X7630 1 1 Right cover assembly “Right cover assembly removal” on
page 238
6 40X7645 1 1 250‑sheet tray assembly “Paper pick motor drive assembly
standard tray removal” on
page 295
7 40X5803 1 1 Duplex reference edge “Duplex reference edge removal”
on page 271
8 40X7619 2 2 Front cover straps “Front cover assembly removal” on
page 258
9 40X7635 1 1 Front cover assembly “Front cover assembly removal” on
page 258
10A 40X7638 1 1 Operator panel and display “Operator panel removal (for CS310
assembly (CS310) models only)” on page 260
10B 41X0908 1 1 Operator panel and display “Operator panel removal (for
assembly (CS410) CS410 models only)” on page 262
10C 41X0909 1 1 Operator panel and display “Operator panel removal (for
assembly (CS510 and CS510 models only)” on page 265
C2132)
11 40X5168 2 2 Pick tires “Pick tire removal” on page 311
12 40X7637 1 1 Operator panel bezel and “Operator panel bezel removal” on
name plates, including: page 260
• Bezel (1)
• Name plates (4)
• Logo plate (1)
• CS310 cover (1)
• CS310 cover (1)
• CS510 USB cover (1)
• CS510 USB cover (1)
13 40X7579 1 1 System fan N/A

Parts catalog
328
 5027

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure

14 40X7632 1 1 Left cover assembly “Left cover assembly removal” on
page 219

Parts catalog
329
 5027

Parts catalog
330
 5027

Assembly 2: Frames
12

11
10

Parts catalog
331
 5027

Assembly 2: Frames
Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
2-1 40X7627 1 1 Printhead laser N/A
2 40X7629 1 1 Fuser drive motor assembly “Fuser drive motor assembly
removal” on page 240
3 40X7646 1 1 Lower left frame and lower “Lower left frame removal” on
right frame with cable cover page 279, “Lower right frame
removal” on page 286
4 40X7652 1 2X Spring parts package N/A
• Tray‑bias spring (2)
• Fuser latch spring (2)
• Image transfer unit front
hold down spring (2)
• Front cover latch spring (2)
5 40X7610 1 1 Image transfer unit “Image transfer unit (ITU)
removal” on page 249
6 40X7614 1 1 Paper pick motor drive “Paper pick motor drive
assembly, standard tray assembly standard tray
removal” on page 295
7 41X0580 1 1 ITU guide “ITU guide removal” on
page 291
8 41X0001 1 1 Drive unit motor “Drive unit motor removal” on
page 221
9 41X0826 1 4 Developer drive coupling “Developer drive coupling
removal” on page 227
10 40X7628 1 1 EP drive gear assembly with “EP drive assembly removal” on
motors and coupling page 221
11 40X7622 1 1 Fuser assembly, 115 V “Fuser assembly removal” on
page 273
11 40X7623 1 1 Fuser assembly, 230 V “Fuser assembly removal” on
page 273
11 40X7624 1 1 Fuser assembly, 100 V “Fuser assembly removal” on
page 273
12 40X7649 1 1 Exit deflector assembly parts “Exit deflector removal” on
packet page 275, “Bin‑full/narrow
• Exit deflector media sensor flag removal” on
page 237, “Right output bin
• Bin‑full/narrow media
deflector removal” on page
sensor flag
277
• Right output bin deflector

Parts catalog
332
 5027

Assembly 3: Electronics

Parts catalog
333
 5027

Assembly 3: Electronics
Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
3‑1 40X7613 1 1 Controller board (CS310) “Controller board removal”
on page 300
1 40X7612 1 1 Controller board (CS410) “Controller board removal”
on page 300
1 40X7611 1 1 Controller board (CS510, C2132) “Controller board removal”
on page 300
2 40X7620 1 1 Toner meter cycle card assembly “Toner meter cycle (TMC)
card removal” on page
240
3 40X7625 1 1 High‑voltage power supply “High‑voltage power
supply (HVPS) removal” on
page 245
4 40X7301 3 1 Photo sensor and retainer (one per “Tray present sensor
package), used for: removal” on page 294,
• Tray present sensor (5A) “Duplex sensor removal”
on page 290, “Bin‑full/
• Duplex sensor (5B)
narrow media sensor
• Bin‑full/narrow media sensor removal” on page 305
(5C)
5 40X7626 1 1 Low‑voltage power supply “Low‑voltage power supply
(universal power supply) (LVPS) assembly removal”
on page 232
6 40X5413 1 1 Fuser exit sensor “Fuser exit sensor removal”
on page 233
7 40X7703 1 1 Speaker (CS510, C2132) N/A
8 40X1766 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): N/A
Bolivia, Peru
8 40X0269 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): USA, N/A
Canada, APG, LAD
8 40X0288 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): N/A
Argentina
8 40X0301 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): N/A
Australia
8 40X4596 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Brazil N/A
8 40X0273 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Chile, N/A
Uruguay, Italy
8 40X1774 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): N/A
Denmark
8 40X0275 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Israel N/A
8 40X3609 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Japan N/A

Parts catalog
334
 5027

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure

8 40X1792 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Korea N/A
8 40X3141 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): N/A
Paraguay, Europe, Middle East,
Indonesia, Africa (HV)
8 40X0303 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): PRC N/A
8 40X1773 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): South N/A
Africa
8 40X1772 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): N/A
Switzerland
8 40X1791 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Taiwan N/A
8 40X0271 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): United N/A
Kingdom
8 40X7229 1 1 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): India N/A

Parts catalog
335
 5027

Parts catalog
336
 5027

Assembly 4: Cables and sensors

Parts catalog
337
 5027

Assembly 4: Cables and sensors

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
4‑1 40X5429 1 1 Image transfer unit paper path thermistor N/A
2 40X5414 2 1 Toner density sensors, left or right (one in N/A
package)
3 40X7046 1 1 Waste toner bottle sensor N/A
4 40X7636 4 4 Toner cartridge contacts (Pogo pin) N/A
5 40X7639 1 1 Operator panel cable (CS310) N/A
6 40X7641 1 1 Operator panel and USB port cables packet N/A
• Operator panel cable (CS410, CS510,
C2132) (6A)
• USB port cable (6B)
7 40X7618 1 1 Front and right side interlock switch cover N/A
assembly
8 40X7647 1 1 Cable packet, used for: N/A
• Fuser exit/narrow media to controller
board (8A)
• Fuser motor, thermistor, and duplex
sensor to controller board (8B)
• LVPS to controller board (8C)
• CMY/K motors to controller board (8D)
• Tray 2 to controller board (8E)
• HVPS to controller board (8F)
• Tray present sensor to controller board
(8G)
• AC power to LVPS (8H)
• Speaker cable (NS)

Parts catalog
338
 5027

Assembly 5: Media drawers and trays

Parts catalog
339
 5027

Assembly 5: Media drawers and trays

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
5-1 40X8089 1 0 Optional 650‑sheet duo “650‑sheet duo drawer assembly
drawer (complete) removal” on page 309
(includes 100‑sheet MPF)
2 40X5168 2 2 Pick tires “Pick tire removal” on page 311
3 40X8091 1 1 650‑sheet Duo Drawer tray “650‑sheet duo drawer tray
assembly assembly removal” on page 308
4 40X8090 1 1 Optional 550‑sheet drawer N/A
(complete)
(CS410, CS510, and C2132
only)

Parts catalog
340
 5027

Assembly 6: Options and miscellaneous

Asm-index P/N Units/opt Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
6‑NS 40X7615 1 1 115 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU) N/A
NS 40X7616 1 1 230 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU) N/A
NS 40X7617 1 1 100 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU) N/A
NS 40X8555 1 1 256MB Flash memory card N/A
NS 40X8568 1 1 Korean font card assembly N/A
NS 40X8557 1 1 Simplified Chinese font card assembly N/A
NS 40X8556 1 1 Traditional Chinese font card assembly N/A
NS 40X8569 1 1 Japanese font card assembly N/A
N/A 40X1368 1 1 USB Cable, packaged (2 m) N/A
NS 40X7648 1 1 Screw packet, miscellaneous screws N/A
NS 40X7445 1 1 2GBx32 DDR3 RAM N/A
NS 40X7567 1 1 1GBx32 DDR3 RAM N/A
NS 40X7857 1 1 160GB Hard drive (CS510, C2132) N/A
NS 40X8572 1 1 Forms and bar code card assembly (CS410) N/A
NS 40X8573 1 1 Forms and bard code card assembly (CS510, N/A
C2132)
NS 40X8574 1 1 Prescribe card assembly (CS410) N/A
NS 40X8575 1 1 Prescribe card assembly (CS510, C2132) N/A
NS 40X7061 1 1 Wireless printserver (external) N/A
NS 40X8701 1 1 Relocation kit (CS310, CS410, CS510) N/A

Parts catalog
341
 5027

342
 5027

Appendix A: Printer specifications

• “Power specifications” on page 343
• “Electrical specifications” on page 343
• “Operating clearances” on page 344
• “Acoustics” on page 346
• “Environment” on page 346
• “Processor” on page 347

Power specifications
The average nominal power requirements for the base printer configuration are shown in the following table
(power levels are shown in watts):
Note: Some modes may not apply to all models.
Printing states Power
Off 0.0W
Sleep Mode 7W
Hibernate Mode 1W
Standby Mode 50W
Ready Mode 40W
Simplex printing 500W
Duplex printing 550W

Maximum current shown in amp ergs.

Notes:
• Using a power converter or inverter is not recommended.
• The CS310, CS410, and CS510 models are ENERGY STAR Qualified.
• All models ship with Sleep Mode set to On.

Electrical specifications
Low-voltage models
• 100 to 127 V ac at 50 to 60 hertz (Hz) nominal
• 90 to 137 V ac, extreme

High-voltage models
• 220 to 240 V ac at 50 to 60 hertz (Hz) nominal (not available in all countries and regions)

Appendix A: Printer specifications

343
 5027

Operating clearances
Note: Allow additional clearance around the printer for adding options, such as additional input trays.

CS310

1 Right side 152.4 mm (6 in.)

2 Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3 Left side 76.2 mm (3 in.)
4 Rear 101.6 (4 in.)
5 Top 254 mm (10 in.)

Appendix A: Printer specifications

344
 5027

CS410

1 Right side 102 mm (4 in.)

2 Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3 Left side 152 mm (6 in.)
4 Rear 102 mm (4 in.)
5 Top 254 mm (10 in.)

CS510

Appendix A: Printer specifications

345
 5027

1 Right side 102 mm (4 in.)

2 Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3 Left side 152 mm (6 in.)
4 Rear 102 mm (4 in.)
5 Top 254 mm (10 in.)

Acoustics
All measurements are made in accordance with ISO 7779 and conform with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to all models.
Status 1‑meter average sound pressure dBA
Printing 48 dBA
Ready Inaudible

Status 1‑meter average sound pressure dBA

Printing 50 dBA
Ready Inaudible

Note: Values are subject to chance. See http://www.lexmark.com for current values.

Environment
Printer Temperature and Humidity
• Operating
– Temperature: 60 to 90° F (15.6 to 32.2° C)
– Relative humidity: 8 to 80%
– Maximum wet bulb temperature: 73° F (22.8° C)
– Altitude: 10,000 ft. (0 to 3,048 meters)
– Atmospheric pressure: 74.6 kPa
• Power off
– Temperature: 50 to 110° F (10 to 43.3° C)
– Relative humidity: 8 to 80%
– Maximum wet bulb temperature: 80.1° F (26.7° C)
– Altitude: 10,000 ft. (0 to 3,048 meters)
– Atmospheric pressure: 74.6 kPa
• Ambient operating environment*
– Temperature: 60 to 90° F (15.6 to 32.2° C)
– Relative humidity: 8 to 80%
• Storage and shipping (packaged printer) with or without print cartridge
Temperature: -40 to 110° F (-40 to 43.3° C)

Appendix A: Printer specifications

346
 5027

*In some cases, performance specifications (such as paper OCF, EP cartridge usage) are measured at an
ambient condition.

Processor
1.2 GHZ Power PC processor

Appendix A: Printer specifications

347
 5027

348
 5027

Appendix B: Options and features

• “Available internal options” on page 349
• “Media handling options” on page 349
• “Option configurations” on page 350
Lexmark CS310, CS410, and CS510 support only Lexmark CS310, CS410, and CS510 paper-handling options.
These options are not compatible with any other Lexmark printer. Some of the following options are not available
in every country or region.

Available internal options

• Memory cards
– Printer memory
– Flash memory
– Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Bar Code
– PrintCryptionTM
• Printer hard disk
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– RS-232-C Serial ISP
– Parallel 1284-B ISP
– MarkNetTM N8250 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
– MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP

Media handling options

Note: Some media handling options may not be available for all models.
Input options:
• Standard integrated 250‑sheet tray (Tray 1)
• Standard 100‑sheet multipurpose feeder
• Standard 1‑sheet manual feed slot
• Optional 550‑sheet tray (CS410 and CS510 models only)
Output options
• Standard 100‑sheet sensing bin
• Optional 650‑sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)

Appendix B: Options and features

349
 5027

1 Printer control panel

2 Standard bin
3 250‑sheet tray (Tray 1)
4 Manual feeder
5 Optional 650‑sheet duo tray (Tray 2)

Option configurations
The CS310, CS410, and CS510 optional drawers can be configured to run in a stacked configuration. Unlike the
C544n and C544dn printers, the CS310, CS410, and CS510 printers support a maximum of two stacked optional
drawers–one 650 DuoDrawer at tray 2, and an additional 550 drawer at tray 3. The CS310, CS410, and CS510
DuoDrawers are also designed to be downward compatible with the C544n and C544dn printers. Because the
C544n and C544dn 650 DuoDrawer, and the CS310, CS410, and CS510 650 DuoDrawer and 550 drawer share
the same autoconnect features, there are several ways in which the drawers can be stacked together. The
following describes three types of option configurations:

Supported configurations
These configurations are valid and supported. The options are designed and tested according to these types
of configurations.

C544n, C544dn CS310, CS410, Cs410,

Printers C546dtn Printer C546dtn Printer CS510 Printers CS510 Printers

CS310, CS410, CS510 CS310, CS410, CS510 CS310, CS410, CS510 CS310, CS410, CS510 CS310, CS410, CS510
option (650) option (650) option (650) option (650) option (650)

CS410, CS510 CS410, CS510

option (550) option (550)

Appendix B: Options and features

350
 5027

Unsupported configurations
These configurations are invalid and would result to an Invalid Input Config error on a CS310, CS410,
or CS510 printer, or Too Many Trays Attached error on a C544n or C544dn printer.

CS310, CS410, CS310, CS410, CS310, CS410, CS310, CS410, CS310, CS410,
CS510 Printers CS510 Printers CS510 Printers CS510 Printers CS510 Printers

C544n, C544dn C546dtn CS310, CS410, CS510 CS310, CS410, CS510 Cs410, CS510 CS410, CS510
option (650) option (650) option (650) option (550) option (550)

C544n, C544dn C546dtn CS310, CS410, CS510 C544n, C544dn C546dtn Cs410, CS510 CS310, CS410, CS510
option (550) option (650) option (550) option (550) option (650)

Unclaimed configuration
This configuration is not supported and unclaimed, though the printer may not declare an error. This
configuration is functional but is not a valid configuration.
Warning—Potential Damage: The engine code and the options are not designed and tested thoroughly on
this configuration. This could result to unpredictable printer operation.

410,
CS510 Printers

CS410,CS510
option (550)

Appendix B: Options and features

351
 5027

352
 5027

Appendix C: Theory of operation

• “Paper path and transport components” on page 353
• “Print engine theory” on page 356
• “Color theory” on page 359

Paper path and transport components

For an image to be printed, the paper or specialty media has to be moved from an input source (such as a tray)
into the printer and eventually exit into an output source.
The most important component in this process is this paper itself. Old, damaged, or out-of-specification paper
can and will cause feed and transport problems. If you encounter problems, you should always check the paper
first. See “Media guidelines” on page 23. In addition, it is always good practice to check the printer and driver
settings to see if the paper being used matches the user’s settings. It is not uncommon to find a user printing
on cardstock with the printer programmed to print on a plain paper setting.
The printer’s feed and transport components can fail and cause paper jams or other feed and transport
problems. These components should be examined for damage or wear and replaced if necessary.

Paper path information

The printer has a simple C‑shaped paper path. The tray 1 paper is shown in red and the optional 650‑sheet
Duo Drawer paper path is not shown.
Paper is fed from the rear of the printer and travels upward through the front cover.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

353
 5027

There is a duplex unit on the printers. The duplex unit is built into the front cover and Tray 1.

Note: The ACM is also known as the paper feed roller assembly.

Transport components
The paper is fed from the tray into the printer by a pick roll and sent to two sets of feed rollers which time the
paper to enter the Electrophotographic Process (EP Process) at just the right moment. The feed rollers push
the paper to the image transfer unit where the image is transferred to the page.
The transfer roller moves the paper to the fuser where heat and pressure are applied to the page. The fuser
rollers push the paper toward the exit bin and past the exit sensor. The exit rollers guide the paper into the
output bin.
Note: If the printer posts a paper jam message but no paper is found, paper dust or paper particles may have
fallen into one of the sensor eyes. Use a can of compressed air to gently clean the sensor.

Duplexing
Printers with duplex support use a secondary paper path to print on the second side of a sheet of paper. The
duplexing process is summarized as follows:

Appendix C: Theory of operation

354
 5027

After the first side of the paper is printed and the trailing edge of the paper clears the fuser exit sensor, the
fuser motor engages to reverse the paper direction and feed it into the duplex unit. The pick motor also reverses.
The pick motor drives the duplex aligner rolls (A), which push the media down to the bottom turnaround in the
paper tray and gate aligner (B).
Note: While the sheet is being transported through the duplex unit, it is the only piece of paper being
processed by the print engine. A user should not attempt to insert a piece of paper into the manual paper
feed while a duplex job is being processed. This would cause a paper jam error.
When the trailing edge of the media clears the fuser, the fuser engine rotates forward to prepare the fuser for
the page traveling though the duplex unit.
As the media reaches the gate aligner, a sensor (S1) is triggered, indicating the presence of the leading edge.
When the S1 sensor is triggered, the paper continues to the (S2) sensor. When the S2 signal is detected, the
speed of the pick motor is adjusted to accommodate the speed of the transfer belt, ensuring the proper
registration of the image on the media. The paper travels to the image transfer unit (C), and the second image
is transferred to the reverse side of the media.
Once the image is transferred, the media travels to the fuser (D), the fuser exit rolls (E), and then to the output
bin.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

355
 5027

Print engine theory

Electrophotographic process (EP process)

The method that all laser and LED printers use to print is called the electrophotographic process. These
machines use differences in charge to manipulate and move toner from the print cartridge to the printed page.
Even though the basic EP Process is the same for every laser and LED printer, the specifics for each printer are
different.

Electrophotographic process basics

This printer is a single-laser printer that use four print cartridges (cyan, yellow, magenta, and black) to create
text and images on paper.
The printer has four photoconductors (sometimes called a photodeveloper cartridge or PC unit) built into the
print cartridges and an image transfer unit (ITU). Each color toner is painted to its respective photoconductor
at the same time. The transfer belt passes under the four photoconductors and the four-color image is produced
and transferred to the paper in one pass.
During the printing process, the printer follows the six basic EP Process steps to create its output to the page.
1 Charge the photoconductor.
2 Expose the photoconductor with the laser.
3 Develop toner on the photoconductor.
4 First transfer to the ITU, and second transfer to the paper.
5 Fuse the toner to the paper.
6 Clean/erase the photoconductor and the ITU.
In summary, the printer’s controller board receives print data and the command to print. The controller board
then initiates the print process. The controller board is the command center for the EP process and coordinates
the various motors and signals.
The high-voltage power supply (HVPS) sends charge to various components in the EP process. The laser fires
on the photoconductors and alters the surface charge relative to the planed image for each photoconductor.
Each photoconductor rotates past its respective developer roll, and toner is developed on the surface of each
photoconductor. The four separate color images are then transferred to the transfer belt on the ITU as it passes
under the photoconductors. After the image is transferred to the transfer belt, the photoconductors are cleaned
and recharged.
The transfer belt carries the four-colored image towards the transfer rolls. Paper is picked up from the tray and
carried to the transfer roll where the image is transferred from the transfer belt to the paper. The timing of the
paper pick is determined by the speed of the transfer belt.
The paper is carried to the fuser rollers where heat and pressure are applied to the page to permanently bond
the toner to the page. The fuser rollers push the paper into the output bin. The transfer unit is cleaned and the
process begins again for the next page.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

356
 5027

Step 1: Charge
During the charge step, voltage is sent from the HVPS to the charge roller beside each of the four
photoconductors. In this printer, the charge roll is part of the photoconductor unit in the print cartridges.
The charge roller puts a uniform negative charge over the entire surface of the photoconductor to prepare it
for the laser beam.

Service tips
• If the surface of the charge roller is damaged (such as a nick or pit), it will cause the charge on the
photoconductor to be uneven. This will cause a repeating mark on the printed page. Check the service
manual for the repeating marks table.
• If the charge roller is severely damaged, the surface of the photoconductor will not be not be properly
charged and heavy amounts of toner will be deposited on the photoconductor. This will cause the printed
page to be saturated with 100% of each color. The imaging basket will need to be replaced sooner.

Step 2: Expose
During the expose step, the laser fires a focused beam of light at the surface of each photoconductor and writes
an invisible image, called a latent image or electrostatic image, for each color.
The laser beam only discharges the surface where the beam hits the photoconductor. This creates a difference
in charge potential between the exposed area and the rest of the photoconductor surface.

Service tips
• The laser beam passes through a glass lens as it exits the laser unit. If this lens gets contaminated with toner
or other debris, it will cause vertical streaking of white/lightness on the page. Cleaning the lens will solve
the problem.
• Never touch the surface of the photoconductor with your bare hand. The oil from your skin may cause a
charge differential on the surface, and toner will not properly stick. The result would be repeating blotches
of voids/light print on a page. Then the photoconductor will have to be replaced.
• The surface of the photoconductor is coated with an organic substance that makes it sensitive to light. Be
sure to cover the photoconductor when you are working on the printer so you don’t “burn” it. If exposed to
light for too long, it will cause light/dark print quality problems and will have to be replaced.

Step 3: Develop
When the laser exposes the photoconductor, the HVPS sends charge to the developer roll. For each color, the
print cartridge engages the photoconductor so it is in contact with the surface. Because of the charge difference
between the toner on the developer roller and the electrostatic image created by the laser, the toner is attracted
to areas of the photoconductor surface exposed by the laser.
This process would be similar to using glue to write on a can and then rolling it over glitter. The glitter sticks to
the glue but won’t stick to the rest of the can.

Service tips
• Never touch the surface of the developer roller with your bare hand. The oil from your skin may cause a
charge differential on the surface, and toner will not stick properly. The result would be repeating blotches
of voids/light print on a page. Then the affected cartridge will have to be replaced.
• If the developer roller is damaged, it will not contact the surface of the photoconductor properly. The result
could be repeating marks, thin vertical voids, or thin vertical lines of color on the printed page. Check the
surface of the developer for damage.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

357
 5027

Step 4a: First transfer

When the latent images are developed on each Photoconductor, the HVPS sends voltage to the 1st Transfer
Rollers inside the ITU.
The charge difference between the developed toner image on the Photoconductor surface and the 1st Transfer
Roller causes the images to transfer to the surface of the ITU belt for each color. This takes place by a direct
surface-to-surface contact between the Photoconductors and the ITU transfer belt.

Service tips
• Never touch the surface of the ITU belt with your bare hand. The oil from your skin will cause a charge
differential on the surface, and toner will not stick properly. The result would be repeating blotches of
voids/light print on a page. Then the ITU belt will have to be replaced.
• Do not use solvents or other cleaners to clean the ITU belt surface. No matter how careful you are, the
surface will be compromised, causing scratches or a charge differential that will produce voids or light
blotches on the printed page. Then the ITU belt will need to be replaced.

Step 4b: Second transfer

When the four planes of color are transferred to the transfer belt from the photoconductors, the image is carried
toward the transfer roll, which is also part of the ITU. Based on the speed of the transfer belt, the proper time
to send the signal to pick the paper from an input source is determined. The pick is timed so that the paper
passes between the transfer belt and transfer roll when the image on the belt reaches the second transfer area.
The HVPS sends voltage to the transfer roll to create a positive charge. When the image on the transfer belt
reaches the transfer roll, the negatively charged toner clings to the paper and the entire image is transferred
from the transfer belt to the paper.

Service tips
• If the transfer roller has nicks, pits, or flat spots on it, the surface doesn’t come into contact with the paper
and transfer unit. This will cause voids or light spots on the page or repeating voids/light areas.
• If the transfer roller does not engage the transfer unit, or does not have voltage coming from the HVPS, the
toner will not fully transfer from the transfer unit; the entire page will be very light or blank. Any toner that
does transfer will be due to a “contact” transfer instead of a “charge” transfer. Check the HVPS contacts to
the transfer roller.

Step 5: Fuse
When the image has been fully transferred to the paper, the transfer roll helps move the paper into the fuser
area.
The fuser applies heat and pressure to the page to melt the toner particles and bond them permanently to the
paper. The fuser moves the paper to the redrive rolls which move the paper to the output bin.

Service tips
• If the fuser rollers are damaged, they can cause toner to be pulled off the page or cause paper jams.
• Toner that rubs off a printed page can be a sign of a malfunctioning fuser or an improper paper setting.
Always check the paper type setting before replacing the fuser. A common mistake is to print on heavier
media (such as cardstock) with the paper type set to plain paper.
• When removing paper jams from the fuser, be sure to use the fuser release tabs to relieve the pressure on
the page. In addition, never pull unfused toner through the fuser if you can help it; try to back the jammed
page out of the fuser in the opposite direction it was travelling.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

358
 5027

Step 6: Clean/Erase
There are two main cleaning processes that take place during the EP Process. One process cleans the transfer
belt, and the other cleans the photoconductors.
Transfer unit clean
When the toner image on the transfer belt has been transferred to the page, the transfer belt rotates around
and is cleaned by the cleaning blade (G). This occurs for every page that is printed.
After the toner is moved to the cleaning blade, the toner is moved to the waste toner area using an auger
system.
Photoconductor clean/erase
After each plane of color has been transferred to the transfer belt from the photoconductors, a cleaning blade
(H) scrapes the remaining toner from the surface of each photoconductor. This is the clean/erase process.
Now the photoconductor surface is prepared to restart the EP Process. This cleaning/erasing cycle happens
after each plane of color is transferred to the transfer belt.

Color theory

Color theory
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer
monitors create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of
red, green, or blue needed to produce a certain color.

What is CMYK color?

Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of
colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses,
inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors
by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.

How is color specified in a document to be printed?

Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they
allow users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program
Help topics.

How does the printer know what color to print?

When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer.
The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate
amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information
determines the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color
conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

359
 5027

Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation? What settings produce the best color?
The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality. The default settings in the PostScript driver
provide the preferred color quality for the majority of printouts.

Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there
are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions.

The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?

Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can
be caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances,
adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the
ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or
negative values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or
decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then
decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance.

My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do
to improve the color?
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To
obtain the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective
projector must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency.
Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies.

What is manual color correction?

When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user-selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user-defined color conversion will be
implemented. Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics,
or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).

Notes:
• Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer
operating system controls the adjustment of colors.
• The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate
preferred colors for the majority of documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table:
1 Press Menu to open the Admin menus.
2 Select Settings, and press Select.
3 Select Quality, and press Select.
4 Select Color Correction, and press Select.
5 Select Manual, and press Select.
The printer is in manual mode, and you need to select a color conversion table.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

360
 5027

6 Press Back to return to the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and press Select.
7 Select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type.
Object type Color conversion tables
RGB Image • Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied to all
RGB Text incoming color formats.
RGB Graphics • sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a
computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.
• Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed
on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray.
• sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color
correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.
CMYK Image • US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP (Specifications for
CMYK Text Web Offset Publishing) color output.
CMYK Graphics • Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate EuroScale color output.
• Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction
setting.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.

How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?

From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from
the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple-page
printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box,
depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB
combination labelled on the box through the selected color conversion table.
To print Color samples from the printer:
1 Press Menu to open the Admin menus.
2 Select Settings, and press Select.
3 Select Quality, and press Select.
4 Select Color Samples, and press Select.
5 Select the Color Conversion table to print, and press Select.
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color.
The color combination labelled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software
program. For more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be
necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color-matching problem depends on the Color
Correction setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images),
and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the
printer Color Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color
conversion is implemented.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

361
 5027

Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or
CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer
operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color
management. The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.

What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?

Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A
detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user-
defined RGBor CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the
RGB or CMYK Increment box.
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:
1 Open a Web browser.
2 In the address bar, type the network printer IP address.
3 Click Configuration.
4 Click Color Samples.
5 Click Detailed Options to narrow the set to one color range.
6 When the Detailed Options page appears, select a color conversion table.
7 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.
8 Enter an Increment value from 1–255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.
9 Click Print to print the detailed Color Samples set.

Appendix C: Theory of operation

362
 5027

Appendix D: Acronyms
Acronyms
ASIC Application-Specific Integrated Circuit
BLDC Brushless DC Motor
BOR Black Only Retract
C Cyan
CCD Charge Coupled Device
CCP Carbonless Copy Paper
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSU Customer Setup
DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
EDO Enhanced Data Out
EP Electrophotographic Process
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
GB Gigabyte
HCF High‑Capacity Feeder
HCIT High-Capacity Input Tray
HCOF High-Capacity Output Finisher
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply
ITU Image Transfer Unit
K Black
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
LED Light-Emitting Diode
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
M Magenta
MB Megabyte
MFP Multi‑Function Printer
MPF Multipurpose Feeder
MROM Masked Read Only Memory
MS Microswitch

Appendix D: Acronyms
363
 5027

NVM Nonvolatile Memory

NVRAM Nonvolatile Random Access Memory
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OPT Optical Sensor
PC Photoconductor
pel, pixel Picture element
POR Power-On Reset
POST Power-On Self Test
PSD Position Sensing Device
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
RIP Raster Imaging Processor
ROM Read Only Memory
SDRAM Synchronous Dual Random Access Memory
SIMM Single Inline Memory Module
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
TPS Toner Patch Sensing
UICC User Interface Controller Card
UPR Used Parts Return
V ac Volts alternating current
V dc Volts direct current
VTB Vacuum Transport Belt
Y Yellow

Appendix D: Acronyms
364
 5027

Appendix E: Screw and retainer identification

table
Screw and retainer identification table
The following table contains screw and fastener descriptions, locations, and quantities necessary to service
the printer. Pay careful attention to each screw type location when performing a removal. You must install the
correct screw type in each location during reassembly.
The size of the screws and fasteners are as close to their actual size as possible, as long as the printout is not
scaled or resized.
P/N Screw type Location Qty
18B0832 Taptite M3 L6 panhead screw Controller board 6
EP drive 6
Fuser drive assembly 2
Fuser sensor 1
Left cover 1
Lower left frame 4
LVPS assembly 6
LVPS cage 4
Paper pick motor drive assembly 2
Rear cover 8
Toner density sensor 4
Toner meter cycle 2
Top cover 5
Wireless antenna 1
18B1236 M3x6 panhead screw Lower right frame 1

3000114 Shoulder screw Paper pick motor drive assembly 1

Appendix E: Screw and retainer identification table

365
 5027

3000167 M3.5 internal lock washer Fuser assembly 1

Top cover 1

3001435 M3x8 screw Lower right frame 1

3003334 3.5x6 mm flat top screw CS410 display bracket 3

CS510 and C2132 UICC card 5

3005980 3.5x8 mm flat top screw Front door 5

3068020 Taptite M3 L4.5 Panhead screw Lower right frame 3

88A0154 M3x8LG W‑HD MCH screw Printhead 3

88A0481 M3.5x8 SEMS MACH screw Fuser assembly 1

Top cover 1

88A0213 Metal ROLN m3.5 8L screw Lower left frame ground cable 1

Appendix E: Screw and retainer identification table

366
 5027

88A0313 Plastic ROLN 2.9 8L screw Toner cartridge contacts 1

CS410 UICC card 5

88A0322 Plastic ROLN 3.5 6L screw AC receptacle 2

Cable cover 5
CS510 and C2132 Display support 4
bracket
Duplex aligner 4
Duplex reference edge 3
Front door 4
CS410, CS510, and C2132 Front 2
USB connector
HVPS 1
Left cover 3
Lower left frame 1
Operator panel 4
CS510 and C2132 Operator panel 3
back cover
CS510 and C2132 speaker 2
Toner meter cycle 2
Toner supply door 1
Top cover 4
Waste toner bottle contact 1
88A0323 Plastic ROLN 3.5 8L screw AC receptacle 2
Duplex aligner 2

88A0324 Plastic ROLN 3.5 10L screw Duplex aligner 2

Appendix E: Screw and retainer identification table

367
 5027

Index
A key repeat initial delay 191
acronyms 363 key repeat rate 191
action for prompts 189 Panel Menus 186
ADF Edge Erase 193 paper prompts 188
alignment, setting for color 169 PPDS Emulation 187
auto align adj 188 Print Quality Pages 185
Auto Color Adjustment 187 Reports 186
avoiding jams 26 restore settings 193
avoiding paper jams 45 safe mode 187
Tray [x] sensing 194
UI automation 191
B USB pnp 192
B5/Executive 193 USB speed 192
bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag removal 237 wipe all settings 193
bin‑full/narrow media sensor removal 305 configuration mode
blank pages 39 accessing 185
button test 172 connectors
controller board 313
C control panel
change history 19 controller board, removing with 198
cleaning controller board
printer exterior 323 control panel, removing with 198
printhead lenses 323 controller board removal 300
cleaning the machine 321 controller board, restoring configuration 199
color adjustment 188
color theory 359 D
Color Trapping 186 data security notice 30, 197
configuration DC Charge Adjust, Bias Adjust, Transfer Adjust 181
action for prompts 189 default values 178
ADF Edge Erase 193 Demo Mode 187
B5/Executive 194 developer drive coupling removal 227
configuration id 179 developer unit removal 244
configuration menu diagnostics
Auto Color Adjustment 187 alignment for color 169
automatically display error screens 192 quick test 168
clear supply usage history 192 registration 167
clearing custom status 192 skew 168
Color Trapping 186 diagnostics menu
Demo Mode 187 processor ID 180
disk encryption 190 USB HS test mode 173
download emuls 187 diagnostics mode
Energy Conserve 187 accessing 166
envelope prompts 189 disk test/clean 177
erase hard disk 193 download emuls 187
Exit Config 195 DRAM test 173
Factory Defaults 194 drive unit motor removal 221
Font Sharpening 190 duplex
jobs on disk 190 left margin setting 175

Index
368
 5027

top margin setting 175 fuser exit sensor removal 233

duplex quick test 173 fuser temperature 181
duplex reference edge removal 271
duplex sensor removal 290 H
duplex support 354 hardware tests
duplex‑left‑margin 175 USB HS test mode 173
duplex‑top‑margin 175 high‑voltage power supply (HVPS) removal 245
horizontal bottom contact connector 209
E horizontal sliding contact connector 215
Electrical specifications 343 horizontal top contact connector 206
electrophotographic process 356
electrostatic‑sensitive parts 198 I
embedded solutions 204 imaging unit (IU) removal 252
Energy Conserve 187 Inspection guide 321
engine setting 1 through 4 179 invalid code, fixing 195, 196
environment specifications 346 invalid engine mode
ep defaults 181 accessing 195
EP drive assembly removal 221 ITU barcode 180
EP process 356 ITU guide removal 291
ep setup
DC Charge Adjust, Bias Adjust, Transfer
Adjust 181
J
ep defaults 181 jams
fuser temperature 181 avoiding 45
error codes locating doors and trays 46
200 paper jam messages 48 locations 46
202 paper jam messages 53 messages 46
23y paper jam messages 57
24y paper jam messages 64 L
25y.xx paper jam messages 68 laser notices 11
ESD‑sensitive parts 198 left cover assembly removal 219
eSF solutions 204 LES applications 191
Even Log low insertion force (LIF) connector 218
display log 183 lower left frame removal 279
Event Log lower right frame removal 286
clear log 184 low‑voltage power supply (LVPS) assembly
print log 183 removal 232
Exit Config 195 lubrication
exit deflector removal 275 guidelines 323
exit diagnostics menu
exit diagnostics 184 M
maintenance kits 322
F model name 179
Factory Defaults 194 motor detection 170
feed tests 171, 176
flash memory test 178 N
Font Sharpening 190 network SE menu
front cover assembly removal 258 accessing 196
fuser assembly removal 273 notices 2
fuser cleaning process 185
fuser drive motor assembly removal 240

Index
369
 5027

O parts catalog
operating clearances 344 parts catalog screw and fastener identification
operator panel table 365
button function test 172 parts catalog legend 326
display test 172 pick tires removal 277
operator panel bezel removal 260 POR sequence 34
operator panel logo plate removal 268 power‑on reset sequence 34
operator panel removal (for CS310 models PPDS Emulation 187
only) 260 preventive maintenance 322
operator panel removal (for CS410 models print quality
only) 262 initial check 36
operator panel removal (for CS510 models Print Quality Pages 185
only) 265 print quality test pages 172
option configurations print quality troubleshooting
supported configurations 350 blank pages 39
unclaimed configurations 350 blurred or fuzzy print 40
unsupported configurations 350 gray background on prints 37
Options half‑color page 40
Available internal options 349 horizontal banding 41
options horizontal line 41
media handling options 349 light print on solids 44
missing image at edge 41
narrow vertical line 42
P problems 44
Panel Menus 186 random marks 42
panel test 172 residual image 43
paper solid color pages 43
characteristics 24 toner rubs off 36
letterhead 25 toner specks appear on prints 42
preprinted forms 25 vertical banding 44
recycled 29 print tests 171
selecting 25 printer default values 178
storing 26 printer setup
unacceptable 25 configuration id 179
paper jams engine setting 1 through 4 179
200.xx 47 ITU barcode 180
202.xx 51 model name 179
23y.xx 56 page count, total 179
24y.xx 64 reset fuser count 180
25y.xx 68 serial number 179
avoiding 45 printhead lenses
paper path 353 cleaning 323
paper pick motor drive assembly standard tray printhead removal 307
removal 295 processor specifications 347
paper sizes
supported by the printer 26
paper types
Q
supported by printer 28 quick disk test 177
where to load 28 quick test 168
paper weights
supported by printer 28 R
rear cover removal 298

Index
370
 5027

recovery mode top cover assembly 302

accessing 195 waste toner bottle 256
recycled paper waste toner bottle contact block 257
using 29 Reports 186
registration 167 menu settings page 182
removal procedures reports
tips 219 installed licenses 183
removals require standby 190
650‑sheet duo drawer assembly 309 reset fuser count 180
650‑sheet duo drawer tray assembly 308 restoring
bin‑full/narrow media sensor 305 configuration file 202
bin‑full/narrow media sensor flag 237 license file 202
controller board 300 right cover assembly removal 238
developer drive coupling 227 right output bin deflector removal 277
developer unit 244
drive unit motor 221 S
duplex reference edge 271 safe mode 34
duplex sensor 290 safety information 14
dust cover 310 schedule for Inspection 321
EP drive assembly 221 scheduled maintenance 322
exit deflector 275 selecting paper 25
front cover assembly 258 sensor test 176
fuser assembly 273 serial number 179
fuser drive motor assembly 240 service checks troubleshooting
fuser exit sensor 233 110 service error messages 82
high‑voltage power supply (HVPS) 245 121 service error messages 84
image transfer unit (ITU) 249 126 service error messages 90
imaging unit (IU) 252 133 service error messages 90
ITU guide 291 141 service error messages 93
left cover assembly 219 147 service error messages 95
lower left frame 279 171 service error messages 97
lower right frame 286 900 service error messages 100
low‑voltage power supply (LVPS) assembly 232 91y service error messages 106
operator panel (for CS310 models only) 260 938 service error messages 106
operator panel (for CS410 models only) 262 95y service error messages 107
operator panel (for CS510 models only) 265 96y service error messages 110
operator panel bezel 260 97y service error messages 111
operator panel logo plate 268 982 service error messages 112
paper pick motor drive assembly standard 990 service error messages 112
tray 295 bin‑full/narrow media sensor service check 115
pick tire 311 cartridge motor error service check 94
pick tires 277 dead printer service check 117
printhead 307 duplex/manual feed sensor (S1) service check 58
rear cover 298 duplex/manual feed sensor (S2) service check 60
right cover assembly 238 engine software service check 106
right output bin deflector 277 fan error service check 98
speaker 238 front door sensor or switches service check 119
toner cartridge contacts 254 fuser exit sensor service check 54
toner density sensor (TDS) (left or right fuser service check 86
sensor) 242, 294 input sensor (S2) jam service check 48
toner meter cycle (TMC) card 240 multipurpose feeder input sensor (S2) jam service
toner supply door 239, 269 check 68

Index
371
 5027

network service check 137 toner supply door removal 239, 269
NVRAM failure service check 109 tools, required 30
operator panel (display blank) service check 131 top cover assembly removal 302
operator panel (display is dim and unchanging) TPS Setup
service check 123 Cal Ref Adj 182
operator panel (displays all diamonds, no beeps, Reset Color Cal 182
or five beeps) service check 127 right or left TPS 181
operator panel (one or more operator panel transport components 354
buttons fail) service check 135 Tray [x] sensing 194
operator panel USB cable service check 136 tray insert msg 186
paper pick motor drive assembly service troubleshooting
check 96 550‑sheet and 650‑sheet trays input option
printhead service check 83 symptoms 140
system software error service check 101 base printer symptoms 114
toner meter cycle (TMC) card service check 117 initial check 33
toner meter sensors (Y, C, M, K) on TMC card troubleshooting, print quality
service check 91 blurred or fuzzy print 40
tray (x) sensor service check 141 color problems 44
tray X input sensor (S2) jam service check 65 gray background on prints 37
trays 2 and 3 (optional) service check 113 half color page 40
usb service check 137 horizontal banding 41
service engineer (SE) menu horizontal line 41
accessing 196 light print on solids 44
service manual conventions 19 missing image at edge 41
skew 168 narrow vertical line 42
solid color pages 43 random marks 42
speaker removal 238 residual image 43
Specifications solid color pages 43
electrical 343 toner rubs off 36
specifications toner specks appear on prints 42
acoustics 346 vertical banding 44
environment 346 troubleshooting, service checks
operating clearances 344 110 service error messages 82
power 343 121 service error messages 84
storing 126 service error messages 90
paper 26 133 service error messages 90
141 service error messages 93
T 147 service error messages 95
test 171 service error messages 97
duplex option top margin 173 900 service error messages 100
tests 91y service error messages 106
base printer sensors 176 938 service error messages 106
feed tests 171, 176 95y service error messages 107
flash memory 178 96y service error messages 110
motor detection 170 97y service error messages 111
print 171 982 service error messages 112
print quality test pages 172 990 service error messages 112
sensor test 176 bin‑full/narrow media sensor service check 115
toner cartridge contacts removal 254 cartridge motor error service check 94
toner density sensor (TDS) (left or right sensor) dead printer service check 117
removal 242, 294 duplex/manual feed sensor (S1) service check 58
toner meter cycle (TMC) card removal 240 duplex/manual feed sensor (S2) service check 60

Index
372
 5027

engine software service check 106 W

fan error service check 98 waste toner bottle contact block removal 257
front door sensor or switches service check 119 waste toner bottle removal 256
fuser exit sensor service check 54
fuser service check 86
input sensor (S2) jam service check 48 Z
multipurpose feeder input sensor (S2) jam service zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors 205
check 68
network service check 137
NVRAM failure service check 109
operator panel (display blank) service check 131
operator panel (display is dim and unchanging)
service check 123
operator panel (displays all diamonds, no beeps,
or five beeps) service check 127
operator panel (one or more operator panel
buttons fail) service check 135
operator panel USB cable service check 136
paper pick motor drive assembly service
check 96
printhead service check 83
system software error service check 101
toner meter cycle (TMC) card service check 117
toner meter sensors (Y, C, M, K) on TMC card
service check 91
tray (x) sensor service check 141
tray X input sensor (S2) jam service check 65
trays 2 and 3 (optional) service check 113
usb service check 137
troubleshooting, understanding the printer
messages
understanding the printer messages 72

U
unacceptable paper 25
understanding the printer messages
troubleshooting
understanding the printer messages 72
updating the printer firmware
using a flash drive 203
using a network computer 203
using the control panel
CS310 163
CS410 163
CS510 163
using the operator panel
understanding the colors of the indicator light and
sleep button lights 165

V
vertical mount contact connector 212

Index
373
 5027

Index
374
 5027

Part number index

P/N Part name Page
40X0269 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): USA, Canada, APG, LAD....................................................................... 334
40X0271 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): United Kingdom...................................................................................... 335
40X0273 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Chile, Uruguay, Italy................................................................................334
40X0275 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Israel........................................................................................................... 334
40X0288 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Argentina...................................................................................................334
40X0301 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Australia.....................................................................................................334
40X0303 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): PRC............................................................................................................. 335
40X1368 USB Cable, packaged (2 m)........................................................................................................................ 341
40X1766 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Bolivia, Peru .............................................................................................334
40X1772 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Switzerland............................................................................................... 335
40X1773 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): South Africa.............................................................................................. 335
40X1774 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Denmark.................................................................................................... 334
40X1791 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Taiwan........................................................................................................ 335
40X1792 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Korea.......................................................................................................... 335
40X3141 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Paraguay, Europe, Middle East, Indonesia, Africa (HV).................335
40X3609 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Japan..........................................................................................................334
40X4596 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Brazil...........................................................................................................334
40X5168 Pick tires.................................................................................................................................................328, 340
40X5413 Fuser exit sensor........................................................................................................................................... 334
40X5414 Toner density sensors, left or right (one in package).......................................................................... 338
40X5429 Image transfer unit paper path thermistor..............................................................................................338
40X5803 Duplex reference edge............................................................................................................................... 328
40X7046 Waste toner bottle sensor...........................................................................................................................338
40X7061 Wireless printserver (external).................................................................................................................... 341
40X7229 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): India............................................................................................................ 335
40X7301 Photo sensor and retainer.......................................................................................................................... 334
40X7445 2GBx32 DDR3 RAM.......................................................................................................................................341
40X7567 1GBx32 DDR3 RAM........................................................................................................................................341
40X7579 System fan...................................................................................................................................................... 328
40X7610 Image transfer unit........................................................................................................................................332
40X7611 Controller board (CS510, C2132)............................................................................................................... 334
40X7612 Controller board (CS410)............................................................................................................................. 334

Part number index

375
 5027

P/N Part name Page

40X7613 Controller board (CS310)............................................................................................................................. 334
40X7614 Paper pick motor drive assembly, standard tray...................................................................................332
40X7615 115 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU)...............................................................................................................341
40X7616 230 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU)............................................................................................................ 341
40X7617 100 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU)............................................................................................................. 341
40X7618 Front and right side interlock switch cover assembly......................................................................... 338
40X7619 Front cover straps......................................................................................................................................... 328
40X7620 Toner meter cycle card assembly............................................................................................................. 334
40X7621 Toner supply door......................................................................................................................................... 328
40X7622 Fuser assembly, 115 V.................................................................................................................................. 332
40X7623 Fuser assembly, 230 V................................................................................................................................ 332
40X7624 Fuser assembly, 100 V................................................................................................................................. 332
40X7625 High‑voltage power supply........................................................................................................................ 334
40X7626 Low‑voltage power supply (universal power supply).......................................................................... 334
40X7627 Printhead laser...............................................................................................................................................332
40X7628 EP drive gear assembly with motors and coupling..............................................................................332
40X7629 Fuser drive motor assembly.......................................................................................................................332
40X7630 Right cover assembly...................................................................................................................................328
40X7632 Left cover assembly..................................................................................................................................... 329
40X7633 Top cover assembly......................................................................................................................................328
40X7635 Front cover assembly...................................................................................................................................328
40X7636 Toner cartridge contacts (Pogo pin)......................................................................................................... 338
40X7637 Operator panel bezel and name plates.................................................................................................. 328
40X7638 Operator panel and display assembly (CS310)..................................................................................... 328
40X7639 Operator panel cable (CS310)....................................................................................................................338
40X7641 Operator panel and USB port cables.......................................................................................................338
40X7643 Controller board cover (CS310, CS410)................................................................................................... 328
40X7644 Controller board cover (CS510, C2132)................................................................................................... 328
40X7645 250‑sheet tray assembly............................................................................................................................ 328
40X7646 Lower left frame and lower right frame with cable cover...................................................................332
40X7647 Cable packet.................................................................................................................................................. 338
40X7648 Screw packet, miscellaneous screws....................................................................................................... 341
40X7649 Exit deflector assembly parts packet.......................................................................................................332
40X7652 Spring parts package................................................................................................................................... 332

Part number index

376
 5027

P/N Part name Page

40X7703 Speaker (CS510, C2132).............................................................................................................................. 334
40X7857 160GB Hard drive (CS510, C2132)..............................................................................................................341
40X8089 Optional 650‑sheet duo drawer (complete) ‑ (includes 100‑sheet MPF)....................................... 340
40X8090 Optional 550‑sheet drawer (complete) ‑ (CS410, CS510, and C2132 only)................................... 340
40X8091 650‑sheet Duo Drawer tray assembly.................................................................................................... 340
40X8555 256MB Flash memory card......................................................................................................................... 341
40X8556 Traditional Chinese font card assembly................................................................................................... 341
40X8557 Simplified Chinese font card assembly.................................................................................................... 341
40X8568 Korean font card assembly.......................................................................................................................... 341
40X8569 Japanese font card assembly..................................................................................................................... 341
40X8572 Forms and bar code card assembly (CS410).......................................................................................... 341
40X8573 Forms and bard code card assembly (CS510, C2132)..........................................................................341
40X8574 Prescribe card assembly (CS410)...............................................................................................................341
40X8575 Prescribe card assembly (CS510, C2132).................................................................................................341
40X8701 Relocation kit (CS310, CS410, CS510)....................................................................................................... 341
40X9244 Bracket, front toner door pivot.................................................................................................................. 328
41X0001 Drive unit motor............................................................................................................................................. 332
41X0580 ITU guide......................................................................................................................................................... 332
41X0826 Developer drive coupling........................................................................................................................... 332
41X0908 Operator panel and display assembly (CS410)..................................................................................... 328
41X0909 Operator panel and display assembly (CS510 and C2132)................................................................328

Part number index

377
 5027

Part number index

378
 5027

Part name index

P/N Part name Page
40X7617 100 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU)............................................................................................................. 341
40X7615 115 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU)...............................................................................................................341
40X7857 160GB Hard drive (CS510, C2132)..............................................................................................................341
40X7567 1GBx32 DDR3 RAM........................................................................................................................................341
40X7616 230 V Maintenance kit (fuser, ITU)............................................................................................................ 341
40X7645 250‑sheet tray assembly............................................................................................................................ 328
40X8555 256MB Flash memory card......................................................................................................................... 341
40X7445 2GBx32 DDR3 RAM.......................................................................................................................................341
40X8091 650‑sheet Duo Drawer tray assembly.................................................................................................... 340
40X9244 Bracket, front toner door pivot.................................................................................................................. 328
40X7647 Cable packet.................................................................................................................................................. 338
40X7613 Controller board (CS310)............................................................................................................................. 334
40X7612 Controller board (CS410)............................................................................................................................. 334
40X7611 Controller board (CS510, C2132)............................................................................................................... 334
40X7643 Controller board cover (CS310, CS410)................................................................................................... 328
40X7644 Controller board cover (CS510, C2132)................................................................................................... 328
41X0826 Developer drive coupling........................................................................................................................... 332
41X0001 Drive unit motor............................................................................................................................................. 332
40X5803 Duplex reference edge............................................................................................................................... 328
40X7628 EP drive gear assembly with motors and coupling..............................................................................332
40X7649 Exit deflector assembly parts packet.......................................................................................................332
40X8572 Forms and bar code card assembly (CS410).......................................................................................... 341
40X8573 Forms and bard code card assembly (CS510, C2132)..........................................................................341
40X7618 Front and right side interlock switch cover assembly......................................................................... 338
40X7635 Front cover assembly...................................................................................................................................328
40X7619 Front cover straps......................................................................................................................................... 328
40X7624 Fuser assembly, 100 V................................................................................................................................. 332
40X7622 Fuser assembly, 115 V.................................................................................................................................. 332
40X7623 Fuser assembly, 230 V................................................................................................................................ 332
40X7629 Fuser drive motor assembly.......................................................................................................................332
40X5413 Fuser exit sensor........................................................................................................................................... 334
40X7625 High‑voltage power supply........................................................................................................................ 334

Part name index

379
 5027

P/N Part name Page

40X7610 Image transfer unit........................................................................................................................................332
40X5429 Image transfer unit paper path thermistor..............................................................................................338
41X0580 ITU guide......................................................................................................................................................... 332
40X8569 Japanese font card assembly..................................................................................................................... 341
40X8568 Korean font card assembly.......................................................................................................................... 341
40X7632 Left cover assembly..................................................................................................................................... 329
40X7646 Lower left frame and lower right frame with cable cover...................................................................332
40X7626 Low‑voltage power supply (universal power supply).......................................................................... 334
40X7638 Operator panel and display assembly (CS310)..................................................................................... 328
41X0908 Operator panel and display assembly (CS410)..................................................................................... 328
41X0909 Operator panel and display assembly (CS510 and C2132)................................................................328
40X7641 Operator panel and USB port cables.......................................................................................................338
40X7637 Operator panel bezel and name plates.................................................................................................. 328
40X7639 Operator panel cable (CS310)....................................................................................................................338
40X8090 Optional 550‑sheet drawer (complete) ‑ (CS410, CS510, and C2132 only)................................... 340
40X8089 Optional 650‑sheet duo drawer (complete) ‑ (includes 100‑sheet MPF)....................................... 340
40X7614 Paper pick motor drive assembly, standard tray...................................................................................332
40X7301 Photo sensor and retainer.......................................................................................................................... 334
40X5168 Pick tires.................................................................................................................................................328, 340
40X0288 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Argentina...................................................................................................334
40X0301 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Australia.....................................................................................................334
40X1766 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Bolivia, Peru .............................................................................................334
40X4596 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Brazil...........................................................................................................334
40X0273 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Chile, Uruguay, Italy................................................................................334
40X1774 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Denmark.................................................................................................... 334
40X7229 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): India............................................................................................................ 335
40X0275 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Israel........................................................................................................... 334
40X3609 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Japan..........................................................................................................334
40X1792 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Korea.......................................................................................................... 335
40X3141 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Paraguay, Europe, Middle East, Indonesia, Africa (HV).................335
40X0303 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): PRC............................................................................................................. 335
40X1773 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): South Africa.............................................................................................. 335
40X1772 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Switzerland............................................................................................... 335
40X1791 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): Taiwan........................................................................................................ 335

Part name index

380
 5027

P/N Part name Page

40X0271 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): United Kingdom...................................................................................... 335
40X0269 Power cord, 2.5 m (straight): USA, Canada, APG, LAD....................................................................... 334
40X8574 Prescribe card assembly (CS410)...............................................................................................................341
40X8575 Prescribe card assembly (CS510, C2132).................................................................................................341
40X7627 Printhead laser...............................................................................................................................................332
40X8701 Relocation kit (CS310, CS410, CS510)....................................................................................................... 341
40X7630 Right cover assembly...................................................................................................................................328
40X7648 Screw packet, miscellaneous screws....................................................................................................... 341
40X8557 Simplified Chinese font card assembly.................................................................................................... 341
40X7703 Speaker (CS510, C2132).............................................................................................................................. 334
40X7652 Spring parts package................................................................................................................................... 332
40X7579 System fan...................................................................................................................................................... 328
40X7636 Toner cartridge contacts (Pogo pin)......................................................................................................... 338
40X5414 Toner density sensors, left or right (one in package).......................................................................... 338
40X7620 Toner meter cycle card assembly............................................................................................................. 334
40X7621 Toner supply door......................................................................................................................................... 328
40X7633 Top cover assembly......................................................................................................................................328
40X8556 Traditional Chinese font card assembly................................................................................................... 341
40X1368 USB Cable, packaged (2 m)........................................................................................................................ 341
40X7046 Waste toner bottle sensor...........................................................................................................................338
40X7061 Wireless printserver (external).................................................................................................................... 341

Part name index

381
 5027

Part name index

382
 PC

WASTE TONER SENSOR

JWT1
ETHERNET
1
JETH1
JUSB1

OPERATOR PANEL JOP1 J1 1

JCTM1 TONER METER

1

SMART CHIP 1 JSC1

COVER OPEN JCVR1

1

SAFETY INTERLOCK JINT1 JMIRR1 PRINTHEAD MIRROR

BOTTOM

1 1

TRAY PRESENT JTRAY1

1

TONER PATCH SENSOR1 JTPS1

1
12
FUSER

TOP
JFUSES1
1 2

TOP
1 JPH1
PRINTHEAD
NARROW MEDIA FUSER EXIT JBIN1
1

CONNECTS TO DEV/TRANSFER HVPS JHVPS1

TONER PATCH SENSOR2 JTPS2

1
JTHM1
FUSER THERMISTOR 1
16

JSP1
PAPER PICK ASM
1 2

1 1

20 2 JFAN1

2 10 2 16 1 1 JWIRE1
JOPT1 JLVPS1 JCARTB1

OPTIONAL TRAY

USB
CONNECTS TO LVPS

CARTRIDGE DRIVE MOTOR

 PC

WASTE TONER SENSOR

JWT1
ETHERNET
1
JETH1
JUSB1
1

OPERATOR PANEL

LATCH
JLCD2

J1 1

JCTM1 TONER METER

1

SMART CHIP 1 JSC1

COVER OPEN JCVR1

1

SAFETY INTERLOCK JINT1 JMIRR1 PRINTHEAD MIRROR

BOTTOM

1 1

TRAY PRESENT JTRAY1

1

TONER PATCH SENSOR1 JTPS1

1
12
FUSER

TOP
JFUSES1
1 2

TOP
1 JPH1
PRINTHEAD
NARROW MEDIA FUSER EXIT JBIN1
1

CONNECTS TO DEV/TRANSFER HVPS JHVPS1

TONER PATCH SENSOR2 JTPS2

1
JTHM1
FUSER THERMISTOR 1
16

JSP1
PAPER PICK ASM
1 2

1 1

20 2 JFAN1

2 10 2 16 1 1 JWIRE1
JOPT1 JLVPS1 JCARTB1

OPTIONAL TRAY

USB
CONNECTS TO LVPS

CARTRIDGE DRIVE MOTOR

 PC

WASTE TONER SENSOR JWT1 ETHERNET

1
JBUSB1 JUSB1 JETH1
1

LATCH
OPERATOR PANEL JLCD2

SMART CHIP
1 JSC1
JCTM1
TONER METER
1
JFPUSB1
COVER OPEN JCVR1
1
SAFETY INTERLOCK JINT1
JHD1
1 F18
Hard Drive
TRAY PRESENT JTRAY1 JMIRR1
PRINTHEAD MIRROR
BOTTOM

1
1

TONER PATCH SENSOR1 JTPS1

1

12

FUSER

TOP
JFUSES1
1 2
1

NARROW MEDIA FUSER EXIT

1 JBIN1

CONNECTS TO DEV/TRANSFER HVPS JHVPS1

JPH1 PRINTHEAD
1

TONER PATCH SENSOR2

JTPS2
1

FUSER THERMISTOR 1 JTHM1

16

PAPER PICK ASM JSP1

1 2

1 JOPT1 LVPS1
20 2

JCARTB1 1 JSPKR1 JFAX1 JFAN1

2 10 2 16

JOPT1
OPTIONAL TRAY

LVPS1
USB
CONNECTS TO LVPS

JCARTB1
CARTRIDGE DRIVE MOTOR

JFAN1

JFAX1
CONNECTS
TO FAX

JSPKR1
SPEAKER